WO2009036055A1 - Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety - Google Patents

Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009036055A1
WO2009036055A1 PCT/US2008/075844 US2008075844W WO2009036055A1 WO 2009036055 A1 WO2009036055 A1 WO 2009036055A1 US 2008075844 W US2008075844 W US 2008075844W WO 2009036055 A1 WO2009036055 A1 WO 2009036055A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
substituted
aliphatic
alkyl
cancer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/075844
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Changgeng Qian
Xiong Cai
Haixiao Zhai
Original Assignee
Curis, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Curis, Inc. filed Critical Curis, Inc.
Priority to CA2698792A priority Critical patent/CA2698792A1/en
Priority to AU2008299008A priority patent/AU2008299008B2/en
Priority to JP2010524241A priority patent/JP2010539094A/en
Priority to CN200880112746A priority patent/CN101835375A/en
Priority to EP08831199A priority patent/EP2194787A4/en
Publication of WO2009036055A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009036055A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/02Stomatological preparations, e.g. drugs for caries, aphtae, periodontitis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06Antiasthmatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/02Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24Antidepressants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04Antibacterial agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/10Antimycotics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00Antiparasitic agents
    • A61P33/02Antiprotozoals, e.g. for leishmaniasis, trichomoniasis, toxoplasmosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A61P7/06Antianaemics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/06Antiarrhythmics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • Protein kinases are enzymes that catalyze the phosphorylation of hydroxyl groups of tyrosine, serine, and threonine residues of proteins. Many aspects of cell life such as cell growth, differentiation, proliferation, cell cycle and survival, depend on protein kinase activities. Furthermore, abnormal protein kinase activity has been related to a host of disorders such as cancer and inflammation. Therefore, there is a great deal of effort directed to identifying ways to modulate protein kinase activities.
  • RTKs Receptor tyrosine kinases
  • PDGFR platelet derived growth factor receptor
  • CSFIR c-Kit
  • c-Met c-Met
  • FMS Receptor tyrosine kinases
  • flk fetus liver kinase
  • the epidermal growth factor receptor family is another family of tyrosine kinase growth factor receptors which includes epithelial growth factor receptor (EGFR, Erb-Bl) and HER2 (Erb-B2). Both of these receptors are involved in the proliferation of normal and malignant cells (Artega, CL. , J. Clin Oncol 19, 2001, 32-40).
  • Overexpression of EGFR is present in at least 70% of human cancers (Seymour, L.K., Curr Drug Targets 2, 2001, 117-133) such as, non-small cell lung carcinomas (NSCLC), breast cancers, gliomas, squamous cell carcinoma of the head and neck, and prostate cancer (Raymond et al, Drugs 60 Suppl 1, 2000, discussion 41-2; Salomon et al, Crit Rev Oncol Hematol 19, 1995, 183-232; Voldborg et al, Ann Oncol 8, 1997, 1197-1206).
  • HER2 is overexpressed in about 15 to 20% of all breast cancers and is associated with more aggressive disease. EGFR and HER2 are therefore widely recognized as attractive targets for the development of new cancer therapies.
  • c-Met Another receptor tyrosine kinase which is an attractive target for cancer therapy is c-Met (Peruzzi and Bottaro, Clin. Cancer Res. 12, 2006 3657-3660;
  • C-Met is expressed in a variety of cell types including epithelial, endothelial and mesenchymal cells and is involved in cell migration, invasion and proliferation.
  • Overexpression of c-Met occurs in various cancers such as renal, bladder, cervical, prostate, breast, lung, colon, esophageal, stomach, ovarian, liver and thyroid cancers, as well as hemangiomas, squamous cell myeloid leukemia, astrocytomas, melanomas, multiple myeloma, and glioblastomas.
  • C-Met activation contributes to the invasive growth of tumors as well as metastasis.
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • Inhibition of angiogenesis would clearly be of value in the treatment of disease states associated with angiogenesis such as cancer, diabetes, psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis, Kaposi's sarcoma, haemangioma, acute and chronic nephropathies, atheroma, arterial restenosis, autoimmune diseases, acute inflammation, endometriosis, dysfunctional uterine bleeding and ocular diseases with retinal vessel proliferation.
  • the dramatic clinical success of the tyrosine kinase inhibitor Gleevec (ABL tyrosine kinase) in the treatment of Chronic Myeloid Leukemia (CML) has spurred a flurry of activity to develop inhibitors of the entire kinome.
  • conjugates or fusion proteins that contain most or all of the amino acid sequences of two different proteins/polypeptides and that retain the individual binding activities of the separate proteins/polypeptides.
  • This approach is made possible by independent folding of the component protein domains and the large size of the conjugates that permits the components to bind their cellular targets in an essentially independent manner.
  • Such an approach is not, however, generally feasible in the case of small molecule therapeutics, where even minor structural modifications can lead to major changes in target binding and/or the pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic properties of the resulting molecule.
  • HDAC histone deacetylases
  • Csordas Biochem. J, 1990, 286: 23-38 teaches that histones are subject to post-translational acetylation of the, ⁇ -amino groups of N-terminal lysine residues, a reaction that is catalyzed by histone acetyl transferase (HATl).
  • HATl histone acetyl transferase
  • Acetylation neutralizes the positive charge of the lysine side chain, and is thought to impact chromatin structure.
  • access of transcription factors to chromatin templates is enhanced by histone hyperacetylation, and enrichment in underacetylated histone H4 has been found in transcriptionally silent regions of the genome (Taunton et al., Science, 1996, 272:408-411).
  • transcriptional silencing due to histone modification can lead to oncogenic transformation and cancer.
  • HDAC inhibitors are being evaluated by clinical investigators.
  • the first FDA approved HDAC inhibitor is Suberoylanilide hydroxamic acid (SAHA, Zolinza®) for the treatment of cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL).
  • Other HDAC inhibitors include hydroxamic acid derivatives, PXDlOl and LAQ824, are currently in the clinical development.
  • benzamide class of HDAC inhibitors MS-275, MGCDO 103 and CI-994 have reached clinical trials. Mourne et al. (Abstract #4725, AACR 2005), demonstrate that thiophenyl modification of benzamides significantly enhance HDAC inhibitory activity against HDACl.
  • HDAC inhibitors in combination with other targeted agents may provide advantageous results in the treatment of cancer.
  • co-treatment with SAHA significantly increased EGFR2 antibody trastuzumab-induced apoptosis of BT-474 and SKBR-3 cells and induced synergistic cytotoxic effects against the breast cancer cells (Bali, Clin. Cancer Res. , 2005, 11, 3392).
  • HDAC inhibitors, such as SAHA have demonstrated synergistic antiproliferative and apoptotic effects when used in combination with gef ⁇ tinib in head and neck cancer cell lines, including lines that are resistant to gef ⁇ tinib monotherapy (Bruzzese et al., Proc. AACR, 2004).
  • Anti-tumor activity observed in PC3 xenografts of the HDAC inhibitor FK228, is dependent upon the repression of angiogenic factors such as VEGF and ⁇ FGF (Sasakawa et al., Biochem. Pharmacol., 2003, 66, 897).
  • the HDAC inhibitor NVP-LAQ824 has been shown to inhibit angiogenesis and has a greater anti-tumor effect when used in combination with the vascular endothelial growth factor receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor PTK787/ZK222584 (Qian et al., Cancer Res., 2004, 64, 66260).
  • the present invention relates to VEGFR inhibitors containing zinc-binding moiety based derivatives that have enhanced and unexpected properties as inhibitors of VEGFR and their use in the treatment of VEGFR related diseases and disorders such as cancer.
  • the compounds of the present invention may further act as HDAC or matrix metalloproteinase (MMP) inhibitors by virtue of their ability to bind zinc ions.
  • MMP matrix metalloproteinase
  • these compounds are active at multiple therapeutic targets and are effective for treating disease.
  • the compounds have enhanced activity when compared to the activities of combinations of separate molecules individually having the VEGFR and HDAC activities.
  • the combination of pharmacophores into a single molecule may provide a synergistic effect as compared to the individual pharmacophores.
  • the present invention provides a compound having a general formula I:
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of CR 21 , NR-8, N, O or S, where R 8 is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
  • R 2 i is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, substituted hydroxy, amino, substituted amino, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, CF 3 , CN, NO 2 , N 3 , substituted carbonyl, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic;
  • Xi-X 3 are independently N or CR 2 ⁇ , Y is NR 8 , O, S, SO, SO 2 , aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic;
  • M is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, CF 3 , CN, N 3 , NO 2 , sulfonyl, acyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylal
  • R 7 and R9 are independently hydrogen, OR', aliphatic or substituted aliphatic, wherein R' is hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic or acyl; provided that if R 7 and R9 are both present, one of R 7 or R9 must be OR' and if Y is absent, R9 must be OR'; and Rs is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
  • Wi is O or S
  • J is O, NH or NCH 3
  • Ri 0 is hydrogen or lower alkyl
  • Wi is O or S
  • Y 2 and Z 2 are independently N, C or CH;
  • Rn and Ri 2 are independently selected from hydrogen or aliphatic;
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, dialkylamino, substituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio, substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl, CF 3 , CN, NO 2 , N 3 , sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic.
  • Y is NR 8 , O, S, SO, SO 2 , aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic; M is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, CF 3 , CN, N 3 , NO 2 , sulfonyl, acyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalky
  • Wi O or S; Yi is absent, N, or CH; Zi is N or
  • R 7 and R 9 are independently hydrogen, OR', aliphatic or substituted aliphatic, wherein R' is hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic or acyl; provided that if R 7 and R 9 are both present, one of R 7 or R9 must be OR' and if Y is absent, R9 must be OR'; and Rg is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
  • Wi is O or S
  • Y 2 and Z 2 are independently N, C or CH;
  • Rn and Ri 2 are independently selected from hydrogen or aliphatic;
  • R 1 , R 2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, dialkylamino, substituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio, substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl, CF 3 , CN, NO 2 , N 3 , sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic.
  • formula (II) as illustrated below, or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and
  • Bi is absent, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl
  • B 2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ) or CO
  • B 3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ), CO
  • B 4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ), CO, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • B 5 is absent, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -
  • compounds of the present invention are compounds represented by formula (III) as illustrated below, or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof:
  • Bi is absent, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl
  • B 2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ) or CO
  • B 3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ), CO
  • B 4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO 2 , N(R 8 ), CO, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • B 5 is absent, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -
  • Representative compounds according to the invention are those selected from the Table A below or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof:
  • the compounds of the invention are able to inhibit HDAC as well as a variety of tyrosine receptor kinases, though generally with varying potencies.
  • the data indicate that compounds in which Y is an oxygen atom have greater inhibitory activity against VEGFR2.
  • the data also indicate that compounds in which Y is an oxygen atom have greater inhibitory activity against c- Met.
  • the data further indicate that compounds in which Y is NH have greater inhibitory activity against EGFR.
  • the invention further provides methods for the prevention or treatment of diseases or conditions involving aberrant proliferation, differentiation or survival of cells.
  • the invention further provides for the use of one or more compounds of the invention in the manufacture of a medicament for halting or decreasing diseases involving aberrant proliferation, differentiation, or survival of cells.
  • the disease is cancer.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating cancer in a subject in need of treatment comprising administering to said subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
  • cancer refers to any cancer caused by the proliferation of malignant neoplastic cells, such as tumors, neoplasms, carcinomas, sarcomas, leukemias, lymphomas and the like.
  • cancers include, but are not limited to, mesothelioma, leukemias and lymphomas such as cutaneous T-cell lymphomas (CTCL), noncutaneous peripheral T-cell lymphomas, lymphomas associated with human T-cell lymphotrophic virus (HTLV) such as adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATLL), B-cell lymphoma, acute nonlymphocytic leukemias, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, lymphomas, and multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, acute lymphatic leukemia (ALL), chronic lymphatic leukemia (CLL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, Burkit
  • myelodisplastic syndrome childhood solid tumors such as brain tumors, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, Wilms' tumor, bone tumors, and soft- tissue sarcomas, common solid tumors of adults such as head and neck cancers (e.g., oral, laryngeal, nasopharyngeal and esophageal), genitourinary cancers (e.g., prostate, bladder, renal, uterine, ovarian, testicular), lung cancer (e.g., small-cell and non small cell), breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, melanoma and other skin cancers, stomach cancer, brain tumors, tumors related to Gorlin's syndrome (e.g., medulloblastoma, meningioma, etc.), and liver cancer.
  • childhood solid tumors such as brain tumors, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, Wilms' tumor, bone tumors, and soft- tissue s
  • Additional exemplary forms of cancer which may be treated by the subject compounds include, but are not limited to, cancer of skeletal or smooth muscle, stomach cancer, cancer of the small intestine, rectum carcinoma, cancer of the salivary gland, endometrial cancer, adrenal cancer, anal cancer, rectal cancer, parathyroid cancer, and pituitary cancer.
  • cancers include, but are not limited to, labial carcinoma, larynx carcinoma, hypopharynx carcinoma, tongue carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, gastric carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, thyroid cancer (medullary and papillary thyroid carcinoma), renal carcinoma, kidney parenchyma carcinoma, cervix carcinoma, uterine corpus carcinoma, endometrium carcinoma, chorion carcinoma, testis carcinoma, urinary carcinoma, melanoma, brain tumors such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, meningioma, medulloblastoma and peripheral neuroectodermal tumors, gall bladder carcinoma, bronchial carcinoma, multiple myeloma, basalioma, teratoma, retinoblast
  • the present invention includes the use of one or more compounds of the invention in the manufacture of a medicament that prevents further aberrant proliferation, differentiation, or survival of cells.
  • compounds of the invention may be useful in preventing tumors from increasing in size or from reaching a metastatic state.
  • the subject compounds may be administered to halt the progression or advancement of cancer or to induce tumor apoptosis or to inhibit tumor angiogenesis.
  • the instant invention includes use of the subject compounds to prevent a recurrence of cancer.
  • This invention further embraces the treatment or prevention of cell proliferative disorders such as hyperplasias, dysplasias and pre-cancerous lesions.
  • Dysplasia is the earliest form of pre-cancerous lesion recognizable in a biopsy by a pathologist.
  • the subject compounds may be administered for the purpose of preventing said hyperplasias, dysplasias or pre-cancerous lesions from continuing to expand or from becoming cancerous. Examples of pre-cancerous lesions may occur in skin, esophageal tissue, breast and cervical intra-epithelial tissue.
  • Combination therapy includes the administration of the subject compounds in further combination with other biologically active ingredients (such as, but not limited to, a second and different antineoplastic agent) and non-drug therapies (such as, but not limited to, surgery or radiation treatment).
  • the compounds of the invention can be used in combination with other pharmaceutically active compounds, preferably compounds that are able to enhance the effect of the compounds of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention can be administered simultaneously (as a single preparation or separate preparation) or sequentially to the other drug therapy.
  • a combination therapy envisions administration of two or more drugs during a single cycle or course of therapy.
  • the subject compounds may be administered in combination with one or more separate agents that modulate protein kinases involved in various disease states.
  • kinases may include, but are not limited to: serine/threonine specific kinases, receptor tyrosine specific kinases and non-receptor tyrosine specific kinases.
  • Serine/threonine kinases include mitogen activated protein kinases (MAPK), meiosis specific kinase (MEK), RAF and aurora kinase.
  • receptor kinase families include epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR) (e.g. HER2/neu, HER3, HER4, ErbB, ErbB2, ErbB3, ErbB4, Xmrk, DER, Let23); fibroblast growth factor (FGF) receptor (e.g.
  • EGFR epidermal growth factor receptor
  • FGF fibroblast growth factor
  • Non- receptor tyrosine kinase families include, but are not limited to, BCR-ABL (e.g. p43 abl , ARG); BTK (e.g. ITK/EMT, TEC); CSK, FAK, FPS, JAK, SRC, BMX, FER, CDK and SYK.
  • the subject compounds may be administered in combination with one or more separate agents that modulate non- kinase biological targets or processes.
  • targets include histone deacetylases (HDAC), DNA methyltransferase (DNMT), heat shock proteins (e.g. VEGFR), and proteosomes.
  • subject compounds may be combined with antineoplastic agents (e.g. small molecules, monoclonal antibodies, antisense RNA, and fusion proteins) that inhibit one or more biological targets such as Zolinza, Tarceva, Iressa, Tykerb, Gleevec, Sutent, Sprycel, Nexavar, Sorafmib, CNF2024, RG108, BMS387032, Aff ⁇ nitak, Avastin, Herceptin, Erbitux, AG24322, PD325901, ZD6474, PD 184322, Obatodax, ABT737 and AEE788.
  • antineoplastic agents e.g. small molecules, monoclonal antibodies, antisense RNA, and fusion proteins
  • antineoplastic agents e.g. small molecules, monoclonal antibodies, antisense RNA, and fusion proteins
  • antineoplastic agents e.g. small molecules, monoclonal antibodies, antisense RNA, and fusion proteins
  • the compounds of the invention are administered in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent.
  • chemotherapeutic agents encompass a wide range of therapeutic treatments in the field of oncology. These agents are administered at various stages of the disease for the purposes of shrinking tumors, destroying remaining cancer cells left over after surgery, inducing remission, maintaining remission and/or alleviating symptoms relating to the cancer or its treatment.
  • alkylating agents such as mustard gas derivatives (Mechlorethamine, cylophosphamide, chlorambucil, melphalan, ifosfamide), ethylenimines (thiotepa, hexamethylmelanine), Alkylsulfonates (Busulfan), Hydrazines and Triazines (Altretamine, Procarbazine, dacarbazine and Temozolomide), Nitrosoureas (Carmustine, Lomustine and Streptozocin), Ifosfamide and metal salts (Carboplatin, Cisplatin, and Oxaliplatin); plant alkaloids such as Podophyllotoxins (Etoposide and Tenisopide), Taxanes (Paclitaxel and Docetaxel), Vinca alkaloids (Vincristine,
  • alkylating agents such as mustard gas derivatives (Mechlorethamine, cylophosphamide, chlorambucil,
  • Anti-tumor antibiotics such as Chromomycins (Dactinomycin and Plicamycin), Anthracyclines (Doxorubicin, Daunorubicin, Epirubicin, Mitoxantrone, Valrubicin and Idarubicin), and miscellaneous antibiotics such as Mitomycin, Actinomycin and Bleomycin; anti-metabolites such as folic acid antagonists
  • pyrimidine antagonists (5- Fluorouracil, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, Capecitabine, and Gemcitabine), purine antagonists (6-Mercaptopurine and 6-Thioguanine) and adenosine deaminase inhibitors (Cladribine, Fludarabine, Mercaptopurine, Clofarabine, Thioguanine, Nelarabine and Pentostatin); topoisomerase inhibitors such as topoisomerase I inhibitors (Ironotecan, topotecan) and topoisomerase II inhibitors (Amsacrine, etoposide, etoposide phosphate, teniposide); monoclonal antibodies (Alemtuzumab, Gemtuzumab ozogamicin, Rituximab, Trastuzumab, Ibritumomab Tioxetan, Cet
  • the compounds of the invention are administered in combination with a chemoprotective agent.
  • Chemoprotective agents act to protect the body or minimize the side effects of chemotherapy. Examples of such agents include, but are not limited to, amfostine, mesna, and dexrazoxane.
  • the subject compounds are administered in combination with radiation therapy. Radiation is commonly delivered internally (implantation of radioactive material near cancer site) or externally from a machine that employs photon (x-ray or gamma-ray) or particle radiation.
  • the combination therapy further comprises radiation treatment
  • the radiation treatment may be conducted at any suitable time so long as a beneficial effect from the co- action of the combination of the therapeutic agents and radiation treatment is achieved. For example, in appropriate cases, the beneficial effect is still achieved when the radiation treatment is temporally removed from the administration of the therapeutic agents, perhaps by days or even weeks.
  • compounds of the invention can be used in combination with an immunotherapeutic agent.
  • immunotherapy is the generation of an active systemic tumor-specific immune response of host origin by administering a vaccine composition at a site distant from the tumor.
  • Various types of vaccines have been proposed, including isolated tumor-antigen vaccines and antiidiotype vaccines.
  • Another approach is to use tumor cells from the subject to be treated, or a derivative of such cells (reviewed by Schirrmacher et al. (1995) J. Cancer Res. Clin. Oncol. 121 :487).
  • Schirrmacher et al. (1995) J. Cancer Res. Clin. Oncol. 121 :487) In U.S. Pat. No. 5,484,596, Hanna Jr. et al.
  • a method for treating a resectable carcinoma to prevent recurrence or metastases comprising surgically removing the tumor, dispersing the cells with collagenase, irradiating the cells, and vaccinating the patient with at least three consecutive doses of about 10 7 cells.
  • Suitable agents for adjunctive therapy include a 5HTi agonist, such as a triptan (e.g. sumatriptan or naratriptan); an adenosine Al agonist; an EP ligand; an NMDA modulator, such as a glycine antagonist; a sodium channel blocker (e.g. lamotrigine); a substance P antagonist (e.g. an NKi antagonist); a cannabinoid; acetaminophen or phenacetin; a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor; a leukotriene receptor antagonist; a DMARD (e.g.
  • a 5HTi agonist such as a triptan (e.g. sumatriptan or naratriptan); an adenosine Al agonist; an EP ligand; an NMDA modulator, such as a glycine antagonist; a sodium channel blocker (e.g. lamotrigine); a substance P antagonist (e.g.
  • methotrexate e.g. methotrexate
  • gabapentin and related compounds e.g. a tricyclic antidepressant (e.g. amitryptilline); a neurone stabilising antiepileptic drug; a mono-aminergic uptake inhibitor (e.g. venlafaxine); a matrix metalloproteinase inhibitor; a nitric oxide synthase (NOS) inhibitor, such as an iNOS or an nNOS inhibitor; an inhibitor of the release, or action, of tumour necrosis factor .alpha.; an antibody therapy, such as a monoclonal antibody therapy; an antiviral agent, such as a nucleoside inhibitor (e.g. lamivudine) or an immune system modulator (e.g.
  • a nucleoside inhibitor e.g. lamivudine
  • an immune system modulator e.g.
  • an opioid analgesic e.g. a local anaesthetic; a stimulant, including caffeine; an H 2 -antagonist (e.g. ranitidine); a proton pump inhibitor (e.g. omeprazole); an antacid (e.g. aluminium or magnesium hydroxide; an antiflatulent (e.g. simethicone); a decongestant (e.g. phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pseudoephedrine, oxymetazoline, epinephrine, naphazoline, xylometazoline, propylhexedrine, or levo-desoxyephedrine); an antitussive (e.g.
  • MMPs matrix metalloproteinases
  • HDACs HDACs regulate MMP expression and activity in 3T3 cells.
  • HDAC trichostatin A
  • MMP2 gelatinase A
  • MMP2 Type IV collagenase
  • Another recent article that discusses the relationship of HDAC and MMPs can be found in Young D.A., et al., Arthritis Research & Therapy, 2005, 7: 503.
  • the commonality between HDAC and MMPs inhibitors is their zinc-binding functionality.
  • compounds of the invention can be used as MMP inhibitors and may be of use in the treatment of disorders relating to or associated with dysregulation of MMP.
  • the overexpression and activation of MMPs are known to induce tissue destruction and are also associated with a number of specific diseases including rheumatoid arthritis, periodontal disease, cancer and atherosclerosis.
  • the compounds may also be used in the treatment of a disorder involving, relating to or, associated with dysregulation of histone deacetylase (HDAC).
  • HDAC histone deacetylase
  • HDAC activity is known to play a role in triggering disease onset, or whose symptoms are known or have been shown to be alleviated by HDAC inhibitors.
  • disorders of this type that would be expected to be amenable to treatment with the compounds of the invention include the following but not limited to: Anti-proliferative disorders (e.g.
  • Neurodegenerative diseases including Huntington's Disease, Polyglutamine disease, Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Seizures, Striatonigral degeneration, Progressive supranuclear palsy, Torsion dystonia, Spasmodic torticollis and dyskinesis, Familial tremor, Gilles de Ia Tourette syndrome, Diffuse Lewy body disease, Progressive supranuclear palsy, Pick's disease, intracerebral hemorrhage, Primary lateral sclerosis, Spinal muscular atrophy, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Hypertrophic interstitial polyneuropathy, Retinitis pigmentosa, Hereditary optic atrophy, Hereditary spastic paraplegia, Progressive ataxia and Shy-Drager syndrome;
  • Metabolic diseases including Type 2 diabetes; Degenerative Diseases of the Eye including Glaucoma, Age-related macular degeneration, Rubeotic glaucoma; Inflammatory diseases and/or Immune system disorders including Rheumatoid Arthritis (RA), Osteoarthritis, Juvenile chronic arthritis, Graft versus Host disease, Psoriasis, Asthma, Spondyloarthropathy, Crohn's Disease, inflammatory bowel disease Colitis Ulcerosa, Alcoholic hepatitis, Diabetes, Sjoegrens's syndrome, Multiple Sclerosis, Ankylosing spondylitis, Membranous glomerulopathy, Discogenic pain, Systemic Lupus Erythematosus; Disease involving angiogenesis including cancer, psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis; Psychological disorders including bipolar disease, schizophrenia, mania, depression and dementia; Cardiovascular Diseases including heart failure, restenosis and arteriosclerosis; Fibrotic diseases including liver fibros
  • Leishmania infection Trypanosoma brucei infection, Toxoplasmosis and coccidlosis and Haematopoietic disorders including thalassemia, anemia and sickle cell anemia.
  • compounds of the invention can be used to induce or inhibit apoptosis, a physiological cell death process critical for normal development and homeostasis. Alterations of apoptotic pathways contribute to the pathogenesis of a variety of human diseases.
  • Compounds of the invention, as modulators of apoptosis will be useful in the treatment of a variety of human diseases with aberrations in apoptosis including cancer (particularly, but not limited to, follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, hormone dependent tumors of the breast, prostate and ovary, and precancerous lesions such as familial adenomatous polyposis), viral infections (including, but not limited to, herpes virus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), autoimmune diseases (including, but not limited to, systemic lupus, erythematosus, immune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psorias
  • the invention provides the use of compounds of the invention for the treatment and/or prevention of immune response or immune -mediated responses and diseases, such as the prevention or treatment of rejection following transplantation of synthetic or organic grafting materials, cells, organs or tissue to replace all or part of the function of tissues, such as heart, kidney, liver, bone marrow, skin, cornea, vessels, lung, pancreas, intestine, limb, muscle, nerve tissue, duodenum, small-bowel, pancreatic-islet-cell, including xeno-transplants, etc.; to treat or prevent graft-versus-host disease, autoimmune diseases, such as rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, thyroiditis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, type I diabetes uveitis, juvenile-onset or recent-onset diabetes mellitus, uveitis, Graves disease, psoriasis, atopic dermatiti
  • the present invention may be used to prevent/suppress an immune response associated with a gene therapy treatment, such as the introduction of foreign genes into autologous cells and expression of the encoded product.
  • a gene therapy treatment such as the introduction of foreign genes into autologous cells and expression of the encoded product.
  • the invention relates to a method of treating an immune response disease or disorder or an immune-mediated response or disorder in a subject in need of treatment comprising administering to said subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
  • the invention provides the use of compounds of the invention in the treatment of a variety of neurodegenerative diseases, a non-exhaustive list of which includes: I. Disorders characterized by progressive dementia in the absence of other prominent neurologic signs, such as Alzheimer's disease; Senile dementia of the Alzheimer type; and Pick's disease (lobar atrophy); II.
  • Syndromes combining progressive dementia with other prominent neurologic abnormalities such as A) syndromes appearing mainly in adults (e.g., Huntington's disease, Multiple system atrophy combining dementia with ataxia and/or manifestations of Parkinson's disease, Progressive supranuclear palsy (Steel-Richardson-Olszewski), diffuse Lewy body disease, and corticodentatonigral degeneration); and B) syndromes appearing mainly in children or young adults (e.g., Hallervorden-Spatz disease and progressive familial myoclonic epilepsy); III.
  • A) syndromes appearing mainly in adults e.g., Huntington's disease, Multiple system atrophy combining dementia with ataxia and/or manifestations of Parkinson's disease, Progressive supranuclear palsy (Steel-Richardson-Olszewski), diffuse Lewy body disease, and corticodentatonigral degeneration
  • B) syndromes appearing mainly in children or young adults e.g
  • Syndromes of gradually developing abnormalities of posture and movement such as paralysis agitans (Parkinson's disease), striatonigral degeneration, progressive supranuclear palsy, torsion dystonia (torsion spasm; dystonia musculorum deformans), spasmodic torticollis and other dyskinesis, familial tremor, and Gilles de Ia Tourette syndrome;
  • Syndromes of progressive ataxia such as cerebellar degenerations (e.g., cerebellar cortical degeneration and olivopontocerebellar atrophy (OPCA)); and spinocerebellar degeneration (Friedreich's atazia and related disorders);
  • cerebellar degenerations e.g., cerebellar cortical degeneration and olivopontocerebellar atrophy (OPCA)
  • spinocerebellar degeneration Friedreich's atazia and related disorders
  • the invention encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention as described above.
  • the invention also encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising hydrates of the compounds of the invention.
  • hydrate includes but is not limited to hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate and the like.
  • the invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising any solid or liquid physical form of the compound of the invention.
  • the compounds can be in a crystalline form, in amorphous form, and have any particle size. The particles may be micronized, or may be agglomerated, particulate granules, powders, oils, oily suspensions or any other form of solid or liquid physical form.
  • compositions suitable for administration can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Such compositions typically comprise a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds above, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the effective amount when treating cancer is an amount effective to selectively induce terminal differentiation of suitable neoplastic cells and less than an amount which causes toxicity in a patient.
  • Compounds of the invention may be administered by any suitable means, including, without limitation, parenteral, intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, implantation, oral, sublingual, buccal, nasal, pulmonary, transdermal, topical, vaginal, rectal, and transmucosal administrations or the like. Topical administration can also involve the use of transdermal administration such as transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices.
  • Pharmaceutical preparations include a solid, semisolid or liquid preparation (tablet, pellet, troche, capsule, suppository, cream, ointment, aerosol, powder, liquid, emulsion, suspension, syrup, injection etc.) containing a compound of the invention as an active ingredient, which is suitable for selected mode of administration.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are administered orally, and are thus formulated in a form suitable for oral administration, i.e., as a solid or a liquid preparation.
  • suitable solid oral formulations include tablets, capsules, pills, granules, pellets, sachets and effervescent, powders, and the like.
  • Suitable liquid oral formulations include solutions, suspensions, dispersions, emulsions, oils and the like.
  • the composition is formulated in a capsule.
  • the compositions of the present invention comprise in addition to the active compound and the inert carrier or diluent, a hard gelatin capsule.
  • any inert excipient that is commonly used as a carrier or diluent may be used in the formulations of the present invention, such as for example, a gum, a starch, a sugar, a cellulosic material, an acrylate, or mixtures thereof.
  • a preferred diluent is microcrystalline cellulose.
  • compositions may further comprise a disintegrating agent (e.g., croscarmellose sodium) and a lubricant (e.g., magnesium stearate), and may additionally comprise one or more additives selected from a binder, a buffer, a protease inhibitor, a surfactant, a solubilizing agent, a plasticizer, an emulsif ⁇ er, a stabilizing agent, a viscosity increasing agent, a sweetener, a film forming agent, or any combination thereof.
  • a disintegrating agent e.g., croscarmellose sodium
  • a lubricant e.g., magnesium stearate
  • additives selected from a binder, a buffer, a protease inhibitor, a surfactant, a solubilizing agent, a plasticizer, an emulsif ⁇ er, a stabilizing agent, a viscosity increasing agent, a sweetener, a film forming agent, or any combination thereof
  • non-aqueous solvents examples include propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Aqueous carriers include water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, including saline and buffered media.
  • oils are those of petroleum, animal, vegetable, or synthetic origin, for example, peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, olive oil, sunflower oil, and fish- liver oil.
  • Solutions or suspensions can also include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA); buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates, and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose.
  • the pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • compositions may further comprise binders (e.g., acacia, cornstarch, gelatin, carbomer, ethyl cellulose, guar gum, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, povidone), disintegrating agents (e.g., cornstarch, potato starch, alginic acid, silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, guar gum, sodium starch glycolate, Primogel), buffers (e.g., tris-HCL, acetate, phosphate) of various pH and ionic strength, additives such as albumin or gelatin to prevent absorption to surfaces, detergents (e.g., Tween 20, Tween 80, Pluronic F68, bile acid salts), protease inhibitors, surfactants (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate), permeation enhancers, solubilizing agents (e.g., glycerol, polyethylene glycerol
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
  • Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S.
  • Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
  • Daily administration may be repeated continuously for a period of several days to several years. Oral treatment may continue for between one week and the life of the patient. Preferably the administration may take place for five consecutive days after which time the patient can be evaluated to determine if further administration is required.
  • the administration can be continuous or intermittent, e.g., treatment for a number of consecutive days followed by a rest period.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered intravenously on the first day of treatment, with oral administration on the second day and all consecutive days thereafter.
  • compositions that contain an active component are well understood in the art, for example, by mixing, granulating, or tablet- forming processes.
  • the active therapeutic ingredient is often mixed with excipients that are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the active ingredient.
  • the active agents are mixed with additives customary for this purpose, such as vehicles, stabilizers, or inert diluents, and converted by customary methods into suitable forms for administration, such as tablets, coated tablets, hard or soft gelatin capsules, aqueous, alcoholic or oily solutions and the like as detailed above.
  • the amount of the compound administered to the patient is less than an amount that would cause toxicity in the patient. In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound that is administered to the patient is less than the amount that causes a concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma to equal or exceed the toxic level of the compound.
  • the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 10 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 25 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 50 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 100 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 500 nM.
  • the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 1000 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 2500 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 5000 nM.
  • the optimal amount of the compound that should be administered to the patient in the practice of the present invention will depend on the particular compound used and the type of cancer being treated. DEFINITIONS
  • an "aliphatic group” or “aliphatic” is non-aromatic moiety that may be saturated (e.g. single bond) or contain one or more units of unsaturation, e.g., double and/or triple bonds.
  • An aliphatic group may be straight chained, branched or cyclic, contain carbon, hydrogen or, optionally, one or more heteroatoms and may be substituted or unsubstituted.
  • An aliphatic group, when used as a linker preferably contains between about 1 and about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 4 to about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 4-12 atoms, more typically between about 4 and about 8 atoms.
  • An aliphatic group when used as a substituent, preferably contains between about 1 and about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 1 to about 10 atoms, more preferably between about 1-8 atoms, more typically between about 1 and about 6 atoms.
  • aliphatic groups include, for example, polyalkoxyalkyls, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines, for example. Such aliphatic groups may be further substituted. It is understood that aliphatic groups may include alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl groups described herein.
  • substituted carbonyl includes compounds and moieties which contain a carbon connected with a double bond to an oxygen atom, and tautomeric forms thereof.
  • moieties that contain a substituted carbonyl include aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, amides, esters, anhydrides, etc.
  • carbonyl moiety refers to groups such as “alkylcarbonyl” groups wherein an alkyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, "alkenylcarbonyl” groups wherein an alkenyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, "alkynylcarbonyl” groups wherein an alkynyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, “arylcarbonyl” groups wherein an aryl group is covalently attached to the carbonyl group.
  • the term also refers to groups wherein one or more heteroatoms are covalently bonded to the carbonyl moiety.
  • the term includes moieties such as, for example, aminocarbonyl moieties, (wherein a nitrogen atom is bound to the carbon of the carbonyl group, e.g., an amide).
  • acyl refers to hydrogen, alkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated cycloalkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated heterocycle, aryl, and heteroaryl substituted carbonyl groups.
  • acyl includes groups such as (Ci-Ce)alkanoyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, valeryl, caproyl, t- butylacetyl, etc.), (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkylcarbonyl (e.g., cyclopropylcarbonyl, cyclobutylcarbonyl, cyclopentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, etc.), heterocyclic carbonyl (e.g., pyrrolidinylcarbonyl, pyrrolid-2-one-5-carbonyl, piperidinylcarbonyl, piperazinylcarbonyl, tetrahydrofuranylcarbonyl, etc.
  • alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be any one of the groups described in the respective definitions.
  • the acyl group may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents (typically, one to three substituents) independently selected from the group of substituents listed below in the definition for "substituted” or the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be substituted as described above in the preferred and more preferred list of substituents, respectively.
  • alkyl embraces linear or branched radicals having one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkyl radicals are "lower alkyl” radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are lower alkyl radicals having one to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl and the like.
  • alkenyl embraces linear or branched radicals having at least one carbon-carbon double bond of two to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, two to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkenyl radicals are "lower alkenyl” radicals having two to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably about two to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of alkenyl radicals include ethenyl, allyl, propenyl, butenyl and 4-methylbutenyl.
  • alkenyl and “lower alkenyl” embrace radicals having "cis” and “trans” orientations, or alternatively, "E” and "Z” orientations.
  • alkynyl embraces linear or branched radicals having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond of two to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, two to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkynyl radicals are "lower alkynyl” radicals having two to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably about two to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of alkynyl radicals include propargyl, 1- propynyl, 2-propynyl, 1-butyne, 2-butynyl and 1-pentynyl.
  • cycloalkyl embraces saturated carbocyclic radicals having three to about twelve carbon atoms.
  • cycloalkyl embraces saturated carbocyclic radicals having three to about twelve carbon atoms.
  • More preferred cycloalkyl radicals are "lower cycloalkyl” radicals having three to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl.
  • cycloalkenyl embraces partially unsaturated carbocyclic radicals having three to twelve carbon atoms. Cycloalkenyl radicals that are partially unsaturated carbocyclic radicals that contain two double bonds (that may or may not be conjugated) can be called “cycloalkyldienyl". More preferred cycloalkenyl radicals are "lower cycloalkenyl” radicals having four to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl.
  • alkoxy embraces linear or branched oxy-containing radicals each having alkyl portions of one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkoxy radicals are "lower alkoxy" radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably having one to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy and tert-butoxy.
  • alkoxyalkyl embraces alkyl radicals having one or more alkoxy radicals attached to the alkyl radical, that is, to form monoalkoxyalkyl and dialkoxyalkyl radicals.
  • aryl alone or in combination, means a carbocyclic aromatic system containing one, two or three rings wherein such rings may be attached together in a pendent manner or may be fused.
  • aryl embraces aromatic radicals such as phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indane and biphenyl.
  • heterocyclyl "heterocycle” “heterocyclic” or “heterocyclo” embrace saturated, partially unsaturated and unsaturated heteroatom-containing ring- shaped radicals, which can also be called “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloalkenyl” and “heteroaryl” correspondingly, where the heteroatoms may be selected from nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen.
  • saturated heterocyclyl radicals include saturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms (e.g.
  • pyrrolidinyl imidazolidinyl, piperidino, piperazinyl, etc.
  • saturated 3 to 6- membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 oxygen atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms e.g. morpholinyl, etc.
  • saturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms e.g., thiazolidinyl, etc.
  • partially unsaturated heterocyclyl radicals include dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran and dihydrothiazole.
  • Heterocyclyl radicals may include a pentavalent nitrogen, such as in tetrazolium and pyridinium radicals.
  • the term “heterocycle” also embraces radicals where heterocyclyl radicals are fused with aryl or cycloalkyl radicals. Examples of such fused bicyclic radicals include benzofuran, benzothiophene, and the like.
  • the term “heteroaryl” embraces unsaturated heterocyclyl radicals.
  • heteroaryl radicals include unsaturated 3 to 6 membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms, for example, pyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 4H- 1,2,4- triazolyl, lH-l,2,3-triazolyl, 2H-l,2,3-triazolyl, etc.) tetrazolyl (e.g.
  • unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 5 nitrogen atoms for example, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, tetrazolopyridazinyl (e.g., tetrazolo[l,5-b]pyridazinyl, etc.), etc.
  • unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing an oxygen atom for example, pyranyl, furyl, etc.
  • unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing a sulfur atom for example, thienyl, etc.
  • benzoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, etc. unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, for example, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,4- thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, etc.) etc.; unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms (e.g., benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, etc.) and the like.
  • thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl e.g., 1,2,4- thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, etc.
  • unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms e.g., be
  • heterocycloalkyl embraces heterocyclo-substituted alkyl radicals. More preferred heterocycloalkyl radicals are “lower heterocycloalkyl” radicals having one to six carbon atoms in the heterocyclo radicals.
  • alkylthio embraces radicals containing a linear or branched alkyl radical, of one to about ten carbon atoms attached to a divalent sulfur atom. Preferred alkylthio radicals have alkyl radicals of one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkylthio radicals have alkyl radicals are "lower alkylthio" radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms.
  • alkylthio radicals having lower alkyl radicals of one to about eight carbon atoms.
  • Examples of such lower alkylthio radicals are methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, butylthio and hexylthio.
  • aralkyl or "arylalkyl” embrace aryl-substituted alkyl radicals such as benzyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, phenylethyl, and diphenylethyl.
  • aryloxy embraces aryl radicals attached through an oxygen atom to other radicals.
  • aminoalkyl embraces alkyl radicals substituted with amino radicals.
  • Preferred aminoalkyl radicals have alkyl radicals having about one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred aminoalkyl radicals are "lower aminoalkyl” that have alkyl radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are aminoalkyl radicals having lower alkyl radicals having one to eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include aminomethyl, aminoethyl, and the like.
  • alkylamino denotes amino groups which are substituted with one or two alkyl radicals.
  • Preferred alkylamino radicals have alkyl radicals having about one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkylamino radicals are "lower alkylamino” that have alkyl radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are alkylamino radicals having lower alkyl radicals having one to about eight carbon atoms.
  • Suitable lower alkylamino may be monosubstituted N-alkylamino or disubstituted N,N-alkylamino, such as N-methylamino, N-ethylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino or the like.
  • linker means an organic moiety that connects two parts of a compound.
  • Linkers typically comprise a direct bond or an atom such as oxygen or sulfur, a unit such as NR 8 , C(O), C(O)NH, SO, SO 2 , SO 2 NH or a chain of atoms, such as substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenyl
  • the linker B is between 1-24 atoms, preferably 4-24 atoms, preferably 4-18 atoms, more preferably 4-12 atoms, and most preferably about 4-10 atoms. In some embodiments, the linker is a C(O)NH(alkyl) chain or an alkoxy chain.
  • substituted refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent including, but not limited to: halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, haloalkyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, cyano, nitro, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, aminoalkylamino, hydroxy
  • chemical moieties are defined and referred to throughout can be univalent chemical moieties (e.g., alkyl, aryl, etc.) or multivalent moieties under the appropriate structural circumstances clear to those skilled in the art.
  • an "alkyl” moiety can be referred to a monovalent radical (e.g.
  • a bivalent linking moiety can be "alkyl,” in which case those skilled in the art will understand the alkyl to be a divalent radical (e.g., -CH 2 -CH 2 -), which is equivalent to the term “alkylene.”
  • divalent moieties are required and are stated as being “alkoxy”, “alkylamino”, “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl” “alkenyl", “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl”
  • alkoxy", alkylamino", “aryloxy”, “alkylthio”, “aryl”, “heteroaryl”, “heterocyclic”, “alkyl”, “alkenyl”, “alkynyl”, “aliphatic”, or “cycloalkyl” refer to the corresponding divalent
  • halogen refers to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • the term "aberrant proliferation” refers to abnormal cell growth.
  • adjunct therapy encompasses treatment of a subject with agents that reduce or avoid side effects associated with the combination therapy of the present invention, including, but not limited to, those agents, for example, that reduce the toxic effect of anticancer drugs, e.g., bone resorption inhibitors, cardioprotective agents; prevent or reduce the incidence of nausea and vomiting associated with chemotherapy, radiotherapy or operation; or reduce the incidence of infection associated with the administration of myelosuppressive anticancer drugs.
  • angiogenesis refers to the formation of blood vessels. Specifically, angiogenesis is a multi-step process in which endothelial cells focally degrade and invade through their own basement membrane, migrate through interstitial stroma toward an angiogenic stimulus, proliferate proximal to the migrating tip, organize into blood vessels, and reattach to newly synthesized basement membrane (see Folkman et al., Adv. Cancer Res., Vol. 43, pp. 175-203 (1985)).
  • Anti-angiogenic agents interfere with this process. Examples of agents that interfere with several of these steps include thrombospondin-1, angiostatin, endostatin, interferon alpha and compounds such as matrix metalloproteinase
  • MMP MMP inhibitors that block the actions of enzymes that clear and create paths for newly forming blood vessels to follow
  • compounds such as .alpha.v.beta.3 inhibitors, that interfere with molecules that blood vessel cells use to bridge between a parent blood vessel and a tumor
  • agents such as specific COX-2 inhibitors, that prevent the growth of cells that form new blood vessels
  • protein-based compounds that simultaneously interfere with several of these targets.
  • apoptosis refers to programmed cell death as signaled by the nuclei in normally functioning human and animal cells when age or state of cell health and condition dictates.
  • An “apoptosis inducing agent” triggers the process of programmed cell death.
  • cancer denotes a class of diseases or disorders characterized by uncontrolled division of cells and the ability of these cells to invade other tissues, either by direct growth into adjacent tissue through invasion or by implantation into distant sites by metastasis.
  • compound is defined herein to include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, polymorphs, enantiomers, diastereoisomers, racemates and the like of the compounds having a formula as set forth herein.
  • devices refers to any appliance, usually mechanical or electrical, designed to perform a particular function.
  • displasia refers to abnormal cell growth, and typically refers to the earliest form of pre-cancerous lesion recognizable in a biopsy by a pathologist.
  • hypoplasia refers to excessive cell division or growth.
  • an "immunotherapeutic agent” refers to agents used to transfer the immunity of an immune donor, e.g., another person or an animal, to a host by inoculation.
  • the term embraces the use of serum or gamma globulin containing performed antibodies produced by another individual or an animal; nonspecific systemic stimulation; adjuvants; active specific immunotherapy; and adoptive immunotherapy.
  • Adoptive immunotherapy refers to the treatment of a disease by therapy or agents that include host inoculation of sensitized lymphocytes, transfer factor, immune RNA, or antibodies in serum or gamma globulin.
  • inhibitors in the context of neoplasia, tumor growth or tumor cell growth, may be assessed by delayed appearance of primary or secondary tumors, slowed development of primary or secondary tumors, decreased occurrence of primary or secondary tumors, slowed or decreased severity of secondary effects of disease, arrested tumor growth and regression of tumors, among others. In the extreme, complete inhibition, is referred to herein as prevention or chemoprevention.
  • Metastasis refers to the migration of cancer cells from the original tumor site through the blood and lymph vessels to produce cancers in other tissues. Metastasis also is the term used for a secondary cancer growing at a distant site.
  • Neoplasm refers to an abnormal mass of tissue that results from excessive cell division. Neoplasms may be benign (not cancerous), or malignant (cancerous) and may also be called a tumor. The term “neoplasia” is the pathological process that results in tumor formation.
  • pre-cancerous refers to a condition that is not malignant, but is likely to become malignant if left untreated.
  • proliferation refers to cells undergoing mitosis.
  • a "radio therapeutic agent” refers to the use of electromagnetic or particulate radiation in the treatment of neoplasia.
  • recurrence refers to the return of cancer after a period of remission. This may be due to incomplete removal of cells from the initial cancer and may occur locally (the same site of initial cancer), regionally (in vicinity of initial cancer, possibly in the lymph nodes or tissue), and/or distally as a result of metastasis.
  • treatment refers to any process, action, application, therapy, or the like, wherein a mammal, including a human being, is subject to medical aid with the object of improving the mammal's condition, directly or indirectly.
  • vaccine includes agents that induce the patient's immune system to mount an immune response against the tumor by attacking cells that express tumor associated antigens (Teas).
  • the term "effective amount of the subject compounds,” with respect to the subject method of treatment, refers to an amount of the subject compound which, when delivered as part of desired dose regimen, brings about, e.g. a change in the rate of cell proliferation and/or state of differentiation and/or rate of survival of a cell to clinically acceptable standards.
  • This amount may further relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of a neoplasia disorder, including, but is not limited to: 1) reduction in the number of cancer cells; 2) reduction in tumor size; 3) inhibition (i.e., slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) of cancer cell infiltration into peripheral organs; 4) inhibition (i.e., slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) of tumor metastasis; 5) inhibition, to some extent, of tumor growth; 6) relieving or reducing to some extent one or more of the symptoms associated with the disorder; and/or 7) relieving or reducing the side effects associated with the administration of anticancer agents.
  • the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977).
  • the salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting the free base function with a suitable organic acid or inorganic acid.
  • nontoxic acid addition salts include, but are not limited to, salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid lactobionic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid lactobionic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include, but are not limited to, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamo
  • alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • ester refers to esters which hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof.
  • Suitable ester groups include, for example, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic carboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moiety advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms.
  • esters include, but are not limited to, formates, acetates, propionates, butyrates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates.
  • prodrugs refers to those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the present invention.
  • Prodrug as used herein means a compound which is convertible in vivo by metabolic means (e.g. by hydrolysis) to a compound of the invention.
  • prodrugs are known in the art, for example, as discussed in Bundgaard, (ed.), Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985); Widder, et al. (ed.), Methods in Enzymology, vol. 4, Academic Press (1985); Krogsgaard-Larsen, et al., (ed). "Design and Application of Prodrugs, Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Chapter 5, 113-191 (1991); Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Drug Deliver Reviews, 8:1-38(1992); Bundgaard, J. of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 et seq.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration, such as sterile pyrogen-free water. Suitable carriers are described in the most recent edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, a standard reference text in the field, which is incorporated herein by reference. Preferred examples of such carriers or diluents include, but are not limited to, water, saline, finger's solutions, dextrose solution, and 5% human serum albumin. Liposomes and non-aqueous vehicles such as fixed oils may also be used. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • pre-cancerous refers to a condition that is not malignant, but is likely to become malignant if left untreated.
  • subject refers to an animal. Preferably the animal is a mammal. More preferably the mammal is a human. A subject also refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs, fish, birds and the like.
  • the compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties.
  • modifications are known in the art and may include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
  • the synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization.
  • further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds.
  • Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d.
  • Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures.
  • the resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al, Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981).
  • the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, other unsaturation, or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers and/or cis- and trans- isomers.
  • compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient” means a non-toxic, inert solid, semi-solid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; cyclodextrins such as alpha- ( ⁇ ), beta- (B) and gamma- ( ⁇ ) cyclodextrins; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols such as propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl
  • compositions of this invention may be administered orally, parenterally, by inhalation spray, topically, rectally, nasally, buccally, vaginally or via an implanted reservoir, preferably by oral administration or administration by injection.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may contain any conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, adjuvants or vehicles.
  • the pH of the formulation may be adjusted with pharmaceutically acceptable acids, bases or buffers to enhance the stability of the formulated compound or its delivery form.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intracutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarticular, intraarterial, intrasynovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, e
  • Injectable preparations for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions, may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S. P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • the rate of drug release can be controlled.
  • biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or: a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and g
  • the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches.
  • the active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to the compounds of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • a therapeutic composition of the invention is formulated and administered to the patient in solid or liquid particulate form by direct administration e.g., inhalation into the respiratory system.
  • Solid or liquid particulate forms of the active compound prepared for practicing the present invention include particles of respirable size: that is, particles of a size sufficiently small to pass through the mouth and larynx upon inhalation and into the bronchi and alveoli of the lungs. Delivery of aerosolized therapeutics, particularly aerosolized antibiotics, is known in the art (see, for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,767,068 to VanDevanter et al., U.S. Pat. No.
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound of the invention is meant an amount of the compound which confers a therapeutic effect on the treated subject, at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
  • the therapeutic effect may be objective (i.e., measurable by some test or marker) or subjective (i.e., subject gives an indication of or feels an effect).
  • An effective amount of the compound described above may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, preferably from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Effective doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment.
  • the specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or contemporaneously with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • the total daily dose of the compounds of this invention administered to a human or other animal in single or in divided doses can be in amounts, for example, from 0.01 to 50 mg/kg body weight or more usually from 0.1 to 25 mg/kg body weight.
  • Single dose compositions may contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose.
  • treatment regimens according to the present invention comprise administration to a patient in need of such treatment from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound(s) of this invention per day in single or multiple doses.
  • the compounds of the formulae described herein can, for example, be administered by injection, intravenously, intraarterially, subdermally, intraperitoneally, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously; or orally, buccally, nasally, transmucosally, topically, in an ophthalmic preparation, or by inhalation, with a dosage ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg of body weight, alternatively dosages between 1 mg and 1000 mg/dose, every 4 to 120 hours, or according to the requirements of the particular drug.
  • the methods herein contemplate administration of an effective amount of compound or compound composition to achieve the desired or stated effect.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention will be administered from about 1 to about 6 times per day or alternatively, as a continuous infusion.
  • Such administration can be used as a chronic or acute therapy.
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with pharmaceutically excipients or carriers to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration.
  • a typical preparation will contain from about 5% to about 95% active compound (w/w).
  • such preparations may contain from about 20% to about 80% active compound.
  • a maintenance dose of a compound, composition or combination of this invention may be administered, if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, may be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved condition is retained when the symptoms have been alleviated to the desired level. Patients may, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
  • the compounds of formulae I and II, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof may be prepared by any process known to be applicable to the preparation of chemically-related compounds. Suitable processes for making certain intermediates include, for example, those illustrated in US Patent No. 7,074,800. Necessary starting materials may be obtained by standard procedures of organic chemistry. The preparation of such starting materials is described within the accompanying non-limiting Examples. Alternatively necessary starting materials are obtainable by analogous procedures to those illustrated which are within the ordinary skill of a chemist.
  • Step Ik 7-(4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-7-methoxyquinazolin-6-yloxy)-iV- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 2)
  • Step 2c Methyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-methoxybenzoate (Compound 204)
  • a mixture of compound 203 (10 g, crude), iron powder (54 g, 0.96mol), ethanol (100 mL), and H 2 O (20 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours.
  • the mixture was cooled to room temperature and neutralized with aqueous sodium hydroxide (10%).
  • the reaction was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give a residue which was extracted with dichloromethane (200 mL x 2).
  • Step 2f ⁇ /-(Benzofuran-5-yl)-7-(benzyloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-4-amine (Compound 207)
  • Step 2i 7-(4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-iV- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 6)
  • the title compound 6 was prepared as a white solid (96 mg, 16%) from compound 209-6 (600mg, 1.3 mmol) and freshly prepared NH 2 OHZMeOH (7.3 mL,
  • Step 3b l-(2-Fluoro-3-hydroxy-6-nitrophenyl)propan-2-one (Compound 303)
  • a mixture of 302 (4.30 g, 0.02 mol), AcONa (1.72 g, 0.021 mol) and DMF (40 mL) was stirred at 100 0 C for 12 h.
  • the mixture was then filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL).
  • the organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated.
  • Step 3d 7-(Benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6- methoxyquinazoline (Compound 305)
  • a mixture of 206 (1.5 g, 5 mmol), 304 (0.99 g, 6 mmol), K 2 CO 3 (1.38 g, 10 mmol) and DMF (30 mL) was stirred at 8O 0 C for 24 h. The mixture was filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO 4 , and concentrated to give the title compound 305 as a brown solid (1.6 g, 75%): LCMS: 430 [M+l] + .
  • Step 3e 4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-ol (Compound 306)
  • Step 3g 5-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxylpent-anamide (Compound 9)
  • Step 4a Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 307-10)
  • the title compound 307-10 (330 mg, 68%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 306 (340 mg, 1 mmol) and ethyl 6-bromoheptanoate (268 mg, 1.2 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 482 [M+l] + .
  • Step 4b 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxy- hexanamide (Compound 10)
  • Step 5a Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 307-11)
  • the title compound 307-11 (310 mg, 82%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 306 (260 mg, 0.76 mmol) and ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (218 mg, 0.92 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 496 [M+l] + .
  • Step 5b 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyhept- anamide (Compound 11)
  • Step 6c 7-(Benzyloxy)-N-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yl)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 4-amine (Compound 403)
  • a mixture of compound 206 (1.5 g, 5 mmol), 402 (821 mg, 5 mmol) and isopropanol (15 mL) was re fluxed for 1 h.
  • the mixture was cooled to ambient temperature, filtered and dried to give the title compound 403 as a brown solid (1.91 g, 89%): LCMS: 429 [M+l] + .
  • Step 6d 4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-ol
  • Step 6e Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-
  • Step 6f 5 -(4-(4-Fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl- pentanamide (Compound 12)
  • the title compound 12 (103 mg, 69%) was prepared as a pale brown solid from compound 405-12 (151 mg, 0.33 mmol) and freshly prepared NH 2 OH/MeOH (5 mL, 8.85 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2
  • Step 7a Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 7-yloxy) hexanoate (Compound 405-13)
  • the title compound 405-13 (172 mg, 33%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 404 (372 mg, 1.1 mmol) and ethyl 6-bromohexanoate (269 mg, 1.2 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 481 [M+l] + .
  • Step 7b 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl-hexanamide (Compound 13)
  • EXAMPLE 8 Preparation of 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6- methoxy- quinazolin-7-yloxy)-N- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 14)
  • Step 8a Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 7-yloxy)-heptanoate (Compound 405-14)
  • Step 8b 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl- heptanamide
  • Step 9a Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-hydroxybenzoate (Compound 502) A mixture of ethyl 3, 4-dihydroxybenzoate (9.1 g, 50 mmol), benzyl chloride
  • Step 9b Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)benzoate (Compound 503-16)
  • the title compound 503-16 (6.7 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellowish oil from
  • Step 9f Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-chloroquinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 507-16)
  • Step 9g Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)quinazolin- 6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 508-16)
  • Step 9i Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 510-16)
  • Step 9j 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 16)
  • Step 10a Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(5-methoxy-5-oxopentyloxy)benzoate (Compound
  • Step 1Od Methyl 5-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6- yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 506-18)
  • Step 1Of Methyl 5-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5- ylamino)quinazolin-6-yloxy)- pentanoate (Compound 601-18)
  • Step 1Og Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7- hydroxyquinazolin-6-yloxy)-pentanoate (Compound 602-18)
  • a mixture of compound 601-18 (170 mg, 0.33 mmoL), 10% Pd/C (17 mg) in CH 3 OH (5 mL) was stirred under H 2 at 3O 0 C for 24 h.
  • Step 1Oh Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 603-18)
  • Step 1Oi 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin- 6-yloxy)-N-hydroxypentanamide (compound 18)
  • Step Hf Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5- ylamino)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 601-19)
  • Step Hg Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-7-hydroxyquinazolin- 6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 602-19)
  • Step Hh Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 603-19)
  • Step 1 Ii 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl- lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin- 1 - yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide
  • Step 12a Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)benzoate (Compound 503-20)
  • the title compound 503-20 (1.6 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellow oil from compound 502 (4.43 g, 16.3 mmol) and ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (1.0 g, 4.4 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 503-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 429 [M+l] + .
  • Step 12b Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)-2-nitrobenzoate (Compound 504-20)
  • the title compound 504-20 (1.7 g, 100%) was prepared as an orange oil from compound 503-20 (1.58 g, 3.69 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 504-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 496 [M+23] + .
  • Step 12c Ethyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)benzoate (Compound 505-20)
  • Step 12d Ethyl 7-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6-yloxy)heptanoate (compound 506-20)
  • Step 12g Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-7-hy droxyquinazolin- 6-yloxy)-heptanoate (Compound 602-20)
  • Step 12h Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 603-20)
  • Step 12i 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 20)
  • the derivatives defined in the present invention possess anti-proliferation activity. These properties may be assessed, for example, using one or more of the procedures set out below:
  • VEGFR2 tyrosine kinase was produced using a baculovirus expression system in Sf21 insect cells from a construct containing a human VEGFR2 cDNA (GenBank accession No. NM 002253) kinase domain (amino acids 790 to end) fragment amino-terminally fused to 6X histidine.
  • PDGFR-beta tyrosine kinase was produced using a baculovirus expression system from a construct containing a human PDGFR-beta c- DNA (GenBank Accession No. NM 002600) fragment (amino acids 558-1106) amino-terminally fused to 6-histidine.
  • the proteins were purified using M2+/NTA agarose affinity column to purity >85% as determined by coomassie blue-stained SDS-PAGE gel.
  • VEGFR2/KDR assay p33 ATP tracers were incubated with purified recombinant VEGFR2 kinase to monitor the enzyme activity.
  • reactions were carried out in the presence of 0.1 mg/ml VEGFR2 kinase and 0.33mg/ml myelin basic protein. The reaction was carried out at 30 0 C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 5OmM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 30OmM NaCl, 0.ImM EGTA, 0.03% Brij 35, 27OmM sucrose, ImM benzamidine, 0.2mM PMSF, 0.1% 2- mercaptoethanol and lOO ⁇ M ATP.
  • PDGFR-beta assay For PDGFR-beta assay, p33 ATP tracers were incubated with purified recombinant PDGFR-beta kinase to monitor the enzyme activity. In this assay, reactions were carried out in the presence of 0.4 mg/ml PDGFR-beta kinase and 20OnM of AbI peptide substrate (E AI Y A APF AKKK). The reaction was carried out at 30 0 C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 2OmM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10OmM NaCl, 0.05mM EDTA, 0.05% NP-40, ImM DTT 50% glycerol and lOO ⁇ M ATP.
  • E AI Y A APF AKKK AbI peptide substrate
  • HDAC inhibitors were screened using an HDAC fluorimetric assay kit (AK- 500, Biomol, Plymouth Meeting, PA). Test compounds were dissolved in dimethylsulphoxide (DMSO) to give a 20 mM working stock concentration. Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm. Each assay was setup as follows: Defrosted all kit components and kept on ice until use.
  • DMSO dimethylsulphoxide
  • Diluted HeLa nuclear extract 1 :29 in Assay Buffer 50 mM Tris/Cl, pH 8.0, 137 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 1 mM MgCl 2 ).
  • Assay Buffer 50 mM Tris/Cl, pH 8.0, 137 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 1 mM MgCl 2 .
  • Trichostatin A TSA, positive control
  • Diluted Fluor de LysTM developer concentrate 20-fold (e.g. 50 ⁇ l plus 950 ⁇ l Assay Buffer) in cold assay buffer.
  • Second, diluted the 0.2 mM Trichostatin A 100-fold in the Ix Developer e.g.
  • the reaction was carried out at 30 0 C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 20 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 1 mM EGTA, 0.02% Brij 35, 0.02 mg/ml BSA, 0.1 mM Na 3 VO 4 , 2 mM DTT and l ⁇ M ATP.
  • An equal volume of 25% TCA was added to stop the reaction and precipitate the labeled proteins. Precipitated proteins were trapped onto glass fiber B filterplates and excess unlabeled p33 ATP was washed off. The plates were allowed to air-dry prior to the addition of 30 uL/well of Packard Microscint 20.
  • the amount of incorporated isotope was measured using a Perkin Elmer TopCount plate reader. Different concentrations of compounds were added to reaction to assess the activity of compounds to inhibit c-Met kinase. IC 50 was calculated using Prism software with sigmoidal dose-response curve fitting.
  • Glu:Tyr4 l substrate per minute at 30 0 C with a final ATP concentration of lOO ⁇ M.
  • Enzyme is in 25 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Tween-20, 50% glycerol, 10 mM reduced glutathione, and 3 mM DTT.
  • EGFR tyrosine kinase was obtained as GST-kinase fusion protein which was produced using a baculovirus expression system with a construct expressing human EGFR (His672-Alal210) (GenBank Accession No. NM 005228) with an amino-terminal GST tag.
  • the protein was purified by one- step affinity chromatography using glutathione-agarose.
  • An anti-phosphotyrosine monoclonal antibody, P-Tyr-100 was used to detect phosphorylation of biotinylated substrate peptides (EGFR), Biotin-PTPIB (Tyr66).
  • Enzymatic activity was tested in 60 mM HEPES, 5 mM MgCl 2 5 mM MnCl 2 200 ⁇ M ATP, 1.25 mM DTT, 3 ⁇ M Na 3 VO 4 , 1.5 mM peptide, and 50 ng EGF Recepetor Kinase. Bound antibody was detected using the DELFIA system (PerkinElmer, Wellesley, MA) consisting of
  • DELFI A® Europium-labeled Anti-mouse IgG (PerkinElmer, #AD0124), DELFI A® Enhancement Solution (PerkinElmer, #1244-105), and a DELFIA® Streptavidin coated, 96-well Plate (PerkinElmer, AAAND-0005). Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm.
  • Test compounds were dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) to give a 20 mM working stock concentration.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • 4X HTScanTM Tyrosine Kinase Buffer 240 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 20 mM MgCl 2 , 20 mM MnCl, 12 mM NaVO 3
  • Phospho-Tyrosine mAb Phospho-Tyrosine mAb (P-Tyr-100), 1 :1000 in PBS/T with 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA).
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • GST-kinase fusion protein which is produced using a baculovirus expression system from a construct expressing human c-Kit (Thr544-Val976) with an amino-terminal GST tag.
  • the protein was purified by one-step affinity chromatography using glutathione-agarose.
  • An anti-phosphotyrosine monoclonal antibody, P-Tyr-100, is used to detect phosphorylation of biotinylated substrate peptide KDR (Tyr996).
  • Enzymatic activity was tested in 60 mM HEPES, 5 mM MgC12 5 mM MnC12 200 ⁇ M ATP, 1.25 mM DTT, 3 ⁇ M Na3VO4, 1.5 mM peptide, and 50 ng c-Kit. Bound antibody was detected using the DELFIA system (PerkinElmer, Wellesley, MA) consisting of DELFIA® Europium-labeled Anti-mouse IgG (PerkinElmer, #AD0124), DELFIA® Enhancement Solution (PerkinElmer, #1244-105), and a DELFIA® Streptavidin coated, 96-well Plate (PerkinElmer, AAAND-0005). Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's were calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm.
  • DMSO dimethylsulphoxide
  • 25 ⁇ l of 2X ATP/substrate cocktail is added to 25 ⁇ l/well preincubated reaction cocktail/compound.
  • the reaction plate was incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes.
  • 50 ⁇ l/well Stop Buffer 50 mM EDTA, pH 8) was added to stop the reaction.
  • 25 ⁇ l of each reaction and 75 ⁇ l dH 2 O/well was transferred to a 96-well streptavidin-coated plate and incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes. The plate was washed three times with 200 ⁇ l/well PBS/T (PBS, 0.05% Tween-20).
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • TABLE B lists compounds representative of the invention and their activity in HDAC, VEGFR2, EGFR, HER2/ErbB, c-Kit, c-Met and PDGFR assays.
  • the following grading was used: I > 10 ⁇ M, 10 ⁇ M > II > 1 ⁇ M, 1 ⁇ M > III > 0.1 ⁇ M, and IV ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ M for IC 50 .

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to VEGFR inhibitors and their use in the treatment of cell proliferative diseases such as cancer. The said derivatives may further act as HDAC inhibitors.

Description

Docket No. 4045.3022 WO
- 1 -
VEGFR INHIBITORS CONTAINING A ZINC BINDING MOIETY
RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No's. 60/971,030, filed on September 10, 2007 and 60/035,281, filed on March 10, 2008. The entire teachings of the above applications are incorporated herein by reference.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Protein kinases (PK) are enzymes that catalyze the phosphorylation of hydroxyl groups of tyrosine, serine, and threonine residues of proteins. Many aspects of cell life such as cell growth, differentiation, proliferation, cell cycle and survival, depend on protein kinase activities. Furthermore, abnormal protein kinase activity has been related to a host of disorders such as cancer and inflammation. Therefore, there is a great deal of effort directed to identifying ways to modulate protein kinase activities.
Receptor tyrosine kinases ("RTKs") comprise a large family of transmembrane receptors with diverse biological activity. At present, at least nineteen distinct subfamilies of RTKs have been identified. An example of these is the subfamily platelet derived growth factor receptor ("PDGFR"), which includes PDGFRα, PDGFRβ, CSFIR, c-Kit, c-Met and c-FMS. These receptors consist of glycosylated extracellular domains composed of variable numbers of immunoglobin-like loops and an intracellular domain wherein the tyrosine kinase domain is interrupted by unrelated amino acid sequences. Another group which, because of its similarity to the PDGFR subfamily, is sometimes subsumed into the later group is the fetus liver kinase ("flk") receptor subfamily. This group is believed to be made up of kinase insert domain-receptor fetal liver kinase- 1 (KDR/FLK- 1 , VEGF-R2), flk- 1 R, flk-4 and fms-like tyrosine kinase 1 (fit- 1 ).
The epidermal growth factor receptor family is another family of tyrosine kinase growth factor receptors which includes epithelial growth factor receptor (EGFR, Erb-Bl) and HER2 (Erb-B2). Both of these receptors are involved in the proliferation of normal and malignant cells (Artega, CL. , J. Clin Oncol 19, 2001, 32-40). Overexpression of EGFR is present in at least 70% of human cancers (Seymour, L.K., Curr Drug Targets 2, 2001, 117-133) such as, non-small cell lung carcinomas (NSCLC), breast cancers, gliomas, squamous cell carcinoma of the head and neck, and prostate cancer (Raymond et al, Drugs 60 Suppl 1, 2000, discussion 41-2; Salomon et al, Crit Rev Oncol Hematol 19, 1995, 183-232; Voldborg et al, Ann Oncol 8, 1997, 1197-1206). HER2 is overexpressed in about 15 to 20% of all breast cancers and is associated with more aggressive disease. EGFR and HER2 are therefore widely recognized as attractive targets for the development of new cancer therapies.
Another receptor tyrosine kinase which is an attractive target for cancer therapy is c-Met (Peruzzi and Bottaro, Clin. Cancer Res. 12, 2006 3657-3660;
Jeffers et al., MoI. Cell Biol. 1996, 1115-1125). C-Met is expressed in a variety of cell types including epithelial, endothelial and mesenchymal cells and is involved in cell migration, invasion and proliferation. Overexpression of c-Met occurs in various cancers such as renal, bladder, cervical, prostate, breast, lung, colon, esophageal, stomach, ovarian, liver and thyroid cancers, as well as hemangiomas, squamous cell myeloid leukemia, astrocytomas, melanomas, multiple myeloma, and glioblastomas. C-Met activation contributes to the invasive growth of tumors as well as metastasis.
A further member of the tyrosine kinase growth factor receptor family is the vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF") receptor subgroup. VEGF is a dimeric glycoprotein similar to PDGF but has different biological functions and target cell specificity in vivo. In particular, VEGF is presently thought to play an essential role is vasculogenesis and angiogenesis. A more complete listing of the known RTK subfamilies is described in Plowman et al., DN&P, 1994, 7(6):334-339. Inhibition of angiogenesis would clearly be of value in the treatment of disease states associated with angiogenesis such as cancer, diabetes, psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis, Kaposi's sarcoma, haemangioma, acute and chronic nephropathies, atheroma, arterial restenosis, autoimmune diseases, acute inflammation, endometriosis, dysfunctional uterine bleeding and ocular diseases with retinal vessel proliferation. The dramatic clinical success of the tyrosine kinase inhibitor Gleevec (ABL tyrosine kinase), in the treatment of Chronic Myeloid Leukemia (CML) has spurred a flurry of activity to develop inhibitors of the entire kinome. Despite the early success with Gleevec, it has become clear that selectively targeting individual kinases can lead to the development of drug resistant tumors. Cells that have developed mutations within the drug/kinase binding pocket display a growth advantage in the presence of drug eventually leading to disease progression.
To help reduce the chance of developing such drug resistant tumors and to increase the overall response rates observed, pharmaceutical companies have now started to develop broadly acting kinase inhibitors (Atkins, M, et al. , Nat Rev Drug Discov 5(4), 2006, 279-280; Kling, J., Nat Biotechnol 24(8), 2006, 871-2; Frantz, S., Nature, 2006, 942-943; Garber, K., Nat Biotechnol, 2006, 24(2) 127-130). Cediranib (AZD 2171) is found to target VEGFl, VEGF2, VEGF3, Fit- land c-Kit.
Figure imgf000004_0001
Cediranib (AZD-2171)
Furthermore, elucidation of the complex and multifactorial nature of various diseases that involve multiple pathogenic pathways and numerous molecular components suggests that multi-targeted therapies may be advantageous over mono- therapies. Recent combination therapies with two or more agents for many such diseases in the areas of oncology, infectious disease, cardiovascular disease and other complex pathologies demonstrate that this combinatorial approach may provide advantages with respect to overcoming drug resistance, reduced toxicity and, in some circumstances, a synergistic therapeutic effect compared to the individual components.
Certain cancers have been effectively treated with such a combinatorial approach; however, treatment regimes using a cocktail of cytotoxic drugs often are limited by dose limiting toxicities and drug-drug interactions. More recent advances with molecularly targeted drugs have provided new approaches to combination treatment for cancer, allowing multiple targeted agents to be used simultaneously, or combining these new therapies with standard chemotherapeutics or radiation to improve outcome without reaching dose limiting toxicities. However, the ability to use such combinations currently is limited to drugs that show compatible pharmacologic and pharmacodynamic properties. In addition, the regulatory requirements to demonstrate safety and efficacy of combination therapies can be more costly and lengthy than corresponding single agent trials. Once approved, combination strategies may also be associated with increased costs to patients, as well as decreased patient compliance owing to the more intricate dosing paradigms required.
In the field of protein and polypeptide-based therapeutics it has become a commonplace to prepare conjugates or fusion proteins that contain most or all of the amino acid sequences of two different proteins/polypeptides and that retain the individual binding activities of the separate proteins/polypeptides. This approach is made possible by independent folding of the component protein domains and the large size of the conjugates that permits the components to bind their cellular targets in an essentially independent manner. Such an approach is not, however, generally feasible in the case of small molecule therapeutics, where even minor structural modifications can lead to major changes in target binding and/or the pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic properties of the resulting molecule.
The use of histone deacetylases (HDAC) in combination with other targeted agents has been shown to produce synergistic effects. Histone acetylation is a reversible modification, with deacetylation being catalyzed by a family of enzymes termed HDACs. HDACs are represented by X genes in humans and are divided into four distinct classes {J MoI Biol, 2004, 338:1, 17-31). In mammalians class I HDACs (HDACl-3, and HDAC8) are related to yeast RPD3 HDAC, class 2 (HDAC4-7, HDAC9 and HDAClO) related to yeast HDAl, class 4 (HDACl 1), and class 3 (a distinct class encompassing the sirtuins which are related to yeast Sir2). Csordas, Biochem. J, 1990, 286: 23-38 teaches that histones are subject to post-translational acetylation of the, ε-amino groups of N-terminal lysine residues, a reaction that is catalyzed by histone acetyl transferase (HATl). Acetylation neutralizes the positive charge of the lysine side chain, and is thought to impact chromatin structure. Indeed, access of transcription factors to chromatin templates is enhanced by histone hyperacetylation, and enrichment in underacetylated histone H4 has been found in transcriptionally silent regions of the genome (Taunton et al., Science, 1996, 272:408-411). In the case of tumor suppressor genes, transcriptional silencing due to histone modification can lead to oncogenic transformation and cancer.
Several classes of HDAC inhibitors currently are being evaluated by clinical investigators. The first FDA approved HDAC inhibitor is Suberoylanilide hydroxamic acid (SAHA, Zolinza®) for the treatment of cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL). Other HDAC inhibitors include hydroxamic acid derivatives, PXDlOl and LAQ824, are currently in the clinical development. In the benzamide class of HDAC inhibitors, MS-275, MGCDO 103 and CI-994 have reached clinical trials. Mourne et al. (Abstract #4725, AACR 2005), demonstrate that thiophenyl modification of benzamides significantly enhance HDAC inhibitory activity against HDACl.
Recent advances suggest that HDAC inhibitors in combination with other targeted agents may provide advantageous results in the treatment of cancer. For example, co-treatment with SAHA significantly increased EGFR2 antibody trastuzumab-induced apoptosis of BT-474 and SKBR-3 cells and induced synergistic cytotoxic effects against the breast cancer cells (Bali, Clin. Cancer Res. , 2005, 11, 3392). HDAC inhibitors, such as SAHA, have demonstrated synergistic antiproliferative and apoptotic effects when used in combination with gefϊtinib in head and neck cancer cell lines, including lines that are resistant to gefϊtinib monotherapy (Bruzzese et al., Proc. AACR, 2004). Pretreating gefϊtinib resistant cell lines with the HDAC inhibitor, MS-275, led to a growth-inhibitory and apoptotic effect of gefϊtinib similar to that seen in gefitinib-sensitive NSCLC cell lines including those harboring EGFR mutations (Witta S. E., et al., Cancer Res 66:2, 2006, 944-50). The HDAC inhibitor PXDlOl has been shown to act synergistically to inhibit proliferation with the EGFRl inhibitor Tarceva® (erlotinib) (WO2006082428A2).
Anti-tumor activity observed in PC3 xenografts of the HDAC inhibitor FK228, is dependent upon the repression of angiogenic factors such as VEGF and βFGF (Sasakawa et al., Biochem. Pharmacol., 2003, 66, 897). The HDAC inhibitor NVP-LAQ824 has been shown to inhibit angiogenesis and has a greater anti-tumor effect when used in combination with the vascular endothelial growth factor receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor PTK787/ZK222584 (Qian et al., Cancer Res., 2004, 64, 66260).
Current therapeutic regimens of the types described above attempt to address the problem of drug resistance by the administration of multiple agents. However, the combined toxicity of multiple agents due to off-target side effects as well as drug-drug interactions often limit the effectiveness of this approach. Moreover, it often is difficult to combine compounds having differing pharmacokinetics into a single dosage form, and the consequent requirement of taking multiple medications at different time intervals leads to problems with patient compliance that can undermine the efficacy of the drug combinations. In addition, the health care costs of combination therapies may be greater than for single molecule therapies. Moreover, it may be more difficult to obtain regulatory approval of a combination therapy since the burden for demonstrating activity/safety of a combination of two agents may be greater than for a single agent. (Dancey J & Chen H, Nat. Rev. Drug Dis., 2006, 5:649). The development of novel agents that target multiple therapeutic targets selected not by virtue of cross reactivity, but through rational design will help improve patient outcome while avoiding these limitations. Thus, enormous efforts are still directed to the development of selective anti-cancer drugs as well as to new and more efficacious combinations of known anti-cancer drugs.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to VEGFR inhibitors containing zinc-binding moiety based derivatives that have enhanced and unexpected properties as inhibitors of VEGFR and their use in the treatment of VEGFR related diseases and disorders such as cancer.
The compounds of the present invention may further act as HDAC or matrix metalloproteinase (MMP) inhibitors by virtue of their ability to bind zinc ions. Surprisingly these compounds are active at multiple therapeutic targets and are effective for treating disease. Moreover, in some cases it has even more surprisingly been found that the compounds have enhanced activity when compared to the activities of combinations of separate molecules individually having the VEGFR and HDAC activities. In other words, the combination of pharmacophores into a single molecule may provide a synergistic effect as compared to the individual pharmacophores. More specifically, it has been found that it is possible to prepare compounds that simultaneously contain a first portion of the molecule that binds zinc ions and thus permits inhibition of HDAC and/or matrix metalloproteinase (MMP) activity and at least a second portion of the molecule that permits binding to a separate and distinct target that inhibits VEGFR and thus provides therapeutic benefit. Preferably, the compounds of the present invention inhibit both VEGFR and HDAC activity. Accordingly, the present invention provides a compound having a general formula I:
Figure imgf000008_0001
or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof, wherein
Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently selected from the group consisting of CR21, NR-8, N, O or S, where R8 is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic; R2i is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, substituted hydroxy, amino, substituted amino, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, substituted carbonyl, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic; Xi-X3 are independently N or CR2 \, Y is NR8, O, S, SO, SO2, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic;
M is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, CF3, CN, N3, NO2, sulfonyl, acyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkynylarylalkyl, alkynylarylalkenyl, alkynylarylalkynyl, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroarylalkenyl, alkylheteroarylalkynyl, alkenylheteroarylalkyl, alkenylheteroarylalkenyl, alkenylheteroarylalkynyl, alkynylheteroarylalkyl, alkynylheteroarylalkenyl, alkynylheteroarylalkynyl, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkylhererocyclylalkynyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkenyl, or alkynylheterocyclylalkynyl, which one or more methylenes can be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S(O), SO2,
N(Rg), C(O), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where Rs is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic; B is linker; C is selected from:
(a)
Figure imgf000009_0001
; where Wi is O or S; Yi is absent, N, or CH; Zi is N or
CH; R7 and R9 are independently hydrogen, OR', aliphatic or substituted aliphatic, wherein R' is hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic or acyl; provided that if R7 and R9 are both present, one of R7 or R9 must be OR' and if Y is absent, R9 must be OR'; and Rs is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
(b)
Figure imgf000009_0002
; where Wi is O or S; J is O, NH or NCH3; and Ri0 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Figure imgf000009_0003
where Wi is O or S; Y2 and Z2 are independently N, C or CH; and
(d)
Figure imgf000009_0004
; where Zi, Yi, and Wi are as previously defined; Rn and Ri2 are independently selected from hydrogen or aliphatic; R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, dialkylamino, substituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio, substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In a first embodiment of the compounds of the present invention are compounds represented by formula (I) as illustrated above, or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof. In one example, Z1, Z2 and Z3 are independently selected from the group consisting of CR21, NRg, N, O or S, where Rg is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic; R21 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted dialkylamino, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic; Xi-X3 are independently C, N or CR2i;
Y is NR8, O, S, SO, SO2, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic; M is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, CF3, CN, N3, NO2, sulfonyl, acyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkynylarylalkyl, alkynylarylalkenyl, alkynylarylalkynyl, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroarylalkenyl, alkylheteroarylalkynyl, alkenylheteroarylalkyl, alkenylheteroarylalkenyl, alkenylheteroarylalkynyl, alkynylheteroarylalkyl, alkynylheteroarylalkenyl, alkynylheteroarylalkynyl, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkylhererocyclylalkynyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkenyl, or alkynylheterocyclylalkynyl, which one or more methylenes can be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S(O), SO2, N(Rg), C(O), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where Rg hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic; B is linker; C is selected from:
Figure imgf000011_0001
where Wi is O or S; Yi is absent, N, or CH; Zi is N or
CH; R7 and R9 are independently hydrogen, OR', aliphatic or substituted aliphatic, wherein R' is hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic or acyl; provided that if R7 and R9 are both present, one of R7 or R9 must be OR' and if Y is absent, R9 must be OR'; and Rg is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
(b)
Figure imgf000011_0002
; where Wi is O or S; J is O, NH or NCH3; and Ri0 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Figure imgf000011_0003
; where Wi is O or S; Y2 and Z2 are independently N, C or CH; and
(d)
Figure imgf000011_0004
; where Zi, Yi, and Wi are as previously defined; Rn and Ri2 are independently selected from hydrogen or aliphatic; R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, dialkylamino, substituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio, substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic. In one embodiment of the compounds of the present invention are compounds represented by formula (II) as illustrated below, or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof:
Figure imgf000012_0001
wherein Bi is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl; B2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8) or CO; B3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B5 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; M, Y, R', Zi-Z3, X1-X3 and R8 are as previously defined.
In one embodiment of the compounds of the present invention are compounds represented by formula (III) as illustrated below, or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof:
Figure imgf000012_0002
wherein Bi is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl; B2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8) or CO; B3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B5 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; Mi is absent, C1-C6 alkyl, O, S, SO, SO2, NH, alkylamine, CO, aryl, heteroaryl; M2 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, or C2-C6 alkynyl; M3 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, O, S, SO, SO2, NH, alkylamine, aryl, heteroaryl; M4 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, or C2-C6 alkynyl; M5 is OH, SH, NR7R8, CO2R8, SOR8, SO2R8, Ci-C6 alkyl , C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic; Y, R', Zi-Z3, X1-X3 and R8 are as previously defined.
Representative compounds according to the invention are those selected from the Table A below or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof:
TABLE A
Figure imgf000013_0001
Figure imgf000014_0001
As demonstrated in the Examples, the compounds of the invention are able to inhibit HDAC as well as a variety of tyrosine receptor kinases, though generally with varying potencies. The data indicate that compounds in which Y is an oxygen atom have greater inhibitory activity against VEGFR2. The data also indicate that compounds in which Y is an oxygen atom have greater inhibitory activity against c- Met. The data further indicate that compounds in which Y is NH have greater inhibitory activity against EGFR.
The invention further provides methods for the prevention or treatment of diseases or conditions involving aberrant proliferation, differentiation or survival of cells. In one embodiment, the invention further provides for the use of one or more compounds of the invention in the manufacture of a medicament for halting or decreasing diseases involving aberrant proliferation, differentiation, or survival of cells. In preferred embodiments, the disease is cancer. In one embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating cancer in a subject in need of treatment comprising administering to said subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
The term "cancer" refers to any cancer caused by the proliferation of malignant neoplastic cells, such as tumors, neoplasms, carcinomas, sarcomas, leukemias, lymphomas and the like. For example, cancers include, but are not limited to, mesothelioma, leukemias and lymphomas such as cutaneous T-cell lymphomas (CTCL), noncutaneous peripheral T-cell lymphomas, lymphomas associated with human T-cell lymphotrophic virus (HTLV) such as adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATLL), B-cell lymphoma, acute nonlymphocytic leukemias, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, lymphomas, and multiple myeloma, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, acute lymphatic leukemia (ALL), chronic lymphatic leukemia (CLL), Hodgkin's lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, adult T-cell leukemia lymphoma, acute-myeloid leukemia (AML), chronic myeloid leukemia (CML), or hepatocellular carcinoma. Further examples include myelodisplastic syndrome, childhood solid tumors such as brain tumors, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, Wilms' tumor, bone tumors, and soft- tissue sarcomas, common solid tumors of adults such as head and neck cancers (e.g., oral, laryngeal, nasopharyngeal and esophageal), genitourinary cancers (e.g., prostate, bladder, renal, uterine, ovarian, testicular), lung cancer (e.g., small-cell and non small cell), breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, melanoma and other skin cancers, stomach cancer, brain tumors, tumors related to Gorlin's syndrome (e.g., medulloblastoma, meningioma, etc.), and liver cancer. Additional exemplary forms of cancer which may be treated by the subject compounds include, but are not limited to, cancer of skeletal or smooth muscle, stomach cancer, cancer of the small intestine, rectum carcinoma, cancer of the salivary gland, endometrial cancer, adrenal cancer, anal cancer, rectal cancer, parathyroid cancer, and pituitary cancer.
Additional cancers that the compounds described herein may be useful in preventing, treating and studying are, for example, colon carcinoma, familiary adenomatous polyposis carcinoma and hereditary non-polyposis colorectal cancer, or melanoma. Further, cancers include, but are not limited to, labial carcinoma, larynx carcinoma, hypopharynx carcinoma, tongue carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, gastric carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, thyroid cancer (medullary and papillary thyroid carcinoma), renal carcinoma, kidney parenchyma carcinoma, cervix carcinoma, uterine corpus carcinoma, endometrium carcinoma, chorion carcinoma, testis carcinoma, urinary carcinoma, melanoma, brain tumors such as glioblastoma, astrocytoma, meningioma, medulloblastoma and peripheral neuroectodermal tumors, gall bladder carcinoma, bronchial carcinoma, multiple myeloma, basalioma, teratoma, retinoblastoma, choroidea melanoma, seminoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, craniopharyngeoma, osteosarcoma, chondrosarcoma, myosarcoma, liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, Ewing sarcoma, and plasmocytoma. In one aspect of the invention, the present invention provides for the use of one or more compounds of the invention in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of cancer.
In one embodiment, the present invention includes the use of one or more compounds of the invention in the manufacture of a medicament that prevents further aberrant proliferation, differentiation, or survival of cells. For example, compounds of the invention may be useful in preventing tumors from increasing in size or from reaching a metastatic state. The subject compounds may be administered to halt the progression or advancement of cancer or to induce tumor apoptosis or to inhibit tumor angiogenesis. In addition, the instant invention includes use of the subject compounds to prevent a recurrence of cancer.
This invention further embraces the treatment or prevention of cell proliferative disorders such as hyperplasias, dysplasias and pre-cancerous lesions. Dysplasia is the earliest form of pre-cancerous lesion recognizable in a biopsy by a pathologist. The subject compounds may be administered for the purpose of preventing said hyperplasias, dysplasias or pre-cancerous lesions from continuing to expand or from becoming cancerous. Examples of pre-cancerous lesions may occur in skin, esophageal tissue, breast and cervical intra-epithelial tissue. "Combination therapy" includes the administration of the subject compounds in further combination with other biologically active ingredients (such as, but not limited to, a second and different antineoplastic agent) and non-drug therapies (such as, but not limited to, surgery or radiation treatment). For instance, the compounds of the invention can be used in combination with other pharmaceutically active compounds, preferably compounds that are able to enhance the effect of the compounds of the invention. The compounds of the invention can be administered simultaneously (as a single preparation or separate preparation) or sequentially to the other drug therapy. In general, a combination therapy envisions administration of two or more drugs during a single cycle or course of therapy. In one aspect of the invention, the subject compounds may be administered in combination with one or more separate agents that modulate protein kinases involved in various disease states. Examples of such kinases may include, but are not limited to: serine/threonine specific kinases, receptor tyrosine specific kinases and non-receptor tyrosine specific kinases. Serine/threonine kinases include mitogen activated protein kinases (MAPK), meiosis specific kinase (MEK), RAF and aurora kinase. Examples of receptor kinase families include epidermal growth factor receptor (EGFR) (e.g. HER2/neu, HER3, HER4, ErbB, ErbB2, ErbB3, ErbB4, Xmrk, DER, Let23); fibroblast growth factor (FGF) receptor (e.g. FGF- R1,GFF-R2/BEK/CEK3, FGF-R3/CEK2, FGF-R4/TKF, KGF-R); hepatocyte growth/scatter factor receptor (HGFR) (e.g, Met, RON, SEA, SEX); insulin receptor (e.g. IGFI-R); Eph (e.g. CEK5, CEK8, EBK, ECK, EEK, EHK-I, EHK-2, ELK, EPH, ERK, HEK, MDK2, MDK5, SEK); AxI (e.g. Mer/Nyk, Rse); RET; and platelet-derived growth factor receptor (PDGFR) (e.g. PDGFα-R, PDGβ-R, CSFl- R/FMS, SCF-R/C-Kit, VEGF-R/FLT, NEK/FLKl, FLT3/FLK2/STK-1). Non- receptor tyrosine kinase families include, but are not limited to, BCR-ABL (e.g. p43abl, ARG); BTK (e.g. ITK/EMT, TEC); CSK, FAK, FPS, JAK, SRC, BMX, FER, CDK and SYK.
In another aspect of the invention, the subject compounds may be administered in combination with one or more separate agents that modulate non- kinase biological targets or processes. Such targets include histone deacetylases (HDAC), DNA methyltransferase (DNMT), heat shock proteins (e.g. VEGFR), and proteosomes.
In a preferred embodiment, subject compounds may be combined with antineoplastic agents (e.g. small molecules, monoclonal antibodies, antisense RNA, and fusion proteins) that inhibit one or more biological targets such as Zolinza, Tarceva, Iressa, Tykerb, Gleevec, Sutent, Sprycel, Nexavar, Sorafmib, CNF2024, RG108, BMS387032, Affϊnitak, Avastin, Herceptin, Erbitux, AG24322, PD325901, ZD6474, PD 184322, Obatodax, ABT737 and AEE788. Such combinations may enhance therapeutic efficacy over efficacy achieved by any of the agents alone and may prevent or delay the appearance of resistant mutational variants.
In certain preferred embodiments, the compounds of the invention are administered in combination with a chemotherapeutic agent. Chemotherapeutic agents encompass a wide range of therapeutic treatments in the field of oncology. These agents are administered at various stages of the disease for the purposes of shrinking tumors, destroying remaining cancer cells left over after surgery, inducing remission, maintaining remission and/or alleviating symptoms relating to the cancer or its treatment. Examples of such agents include, but are not limited to, alkylating agents such as mustard gas derivatives (Mechlorethamine, cylophosphamide, chlorambucil, melphalan, ifosfamide), ethylenimines (thiotepa, hexamethylmelanine), Alkylsulfonates (Busulfan), Hydrazines and Triazines (Altretamine, Procarbazine, Dacarbazine and Temozolomide), Nitrosoureas (Carmustine, Lomustine and Streptozocin), Ifosfamide and metal salts (Carboplatin, Cisplatin, and Oxaliplatin); plant alkaloids such as Podophyllotoxins (Etoposide and Tenisopide), Taxanes (Paclitaxel and Docetaxel), Vinca alkaloids (Vincristine,
Vinblastine, Vindesine and Vinorelbine), and Camptothecan analogs (Irinotecan and Topotecan); anti-tumor antibiotics such as Chromomycins (Dactinomycin and Plicamycin), Anthracyclines (Doxorubicin, Daunorubicin, Epirubicin, Mitoxantrone, Valrubicin and Idarubicin), and miscellaneous antibiotics such as Mitomycin, Actinomycin and Bleomycin; anti-metabolites such as folic acid antagonists
(Methotrexate, Pemetrexed, Raltitrexed, Aminopterin), pyrimidine antagonists (5- Fluorouracil, Floxuridine, Cytarabine, Capecitabine, and Gemcitabine), purine antagonists (6-Mercaptopurine and 6-Thioguanine) and adenosine deaminase inhibitors (Cladribine, Fludarabine, Mercaptopurine, Clofarabine, Thioguanine, Nelarabine and Pentostatin); topoisomerase inhibitors such as topoisomerase I inhibitors (Ironotecan, topotecan) and topoisomerase II inhibitors (Amsacrine, etoposide, etoposide phosphate, teniposide); monoclonal antibodies (Alemtuzumab, Gemtuzumab ozogamicin, Rituximab, Trastuzumab, Ibritumomab Tioxetan, Cetuximab, Panitumumab, Tositumomab, Bevacizumab); and miscellaneous antineoplastics such as ribonucleotide reductase inhibitors (Hydroxyurea); adrenocortical steroid inhibitor (Mitotane); enzymes (Asparaginase and Pegaspargase); anti-microtubule agents (Estramustine); and retinoids (Bexarotene, Isotretinoin, Tretinoin (ATRA). In certain preferred embodiments, the compounds of the invention are administered in combination with a chemoprotective agent. Chemoprotective agents act to protect the body or minimize the side effects of chemotherapy. Examples of such agents include, but are not limited to, amfostine, mesna, and dexrazoxane. In one aspect of the invention, the subject compounds are administered in combination with radiation therapy. Radiation is commonly delivered internally (implantation of radioactive material near cancer site) or externally from a machine that employs photon (x-ray or gamma-ray) or particle radiation. Where the combination therapy further comprises radiation treatment, the radiation treatment may be conducted at any suitable time so long as a beneficial effect from the co- action of the combination of the therapeutic agents and radiation treatment is achieved. For example, in appropriate cases, the beneficial effect is still achieved when the radiation treatment is temporally removed from the administration of the therapeutic agents, perhaps by days or even weeks.
It will be appreciated that compounds of the invention can be used in combination with an immunotherapeutic agent. One form of immunotherapy is the generation of an active systemic tumor-specific immune response of host origin by administering a vaccine composition at a site distant from the tumor. Various types of vaccines have been proposed, including isolated tumor-antigen vaccines and antiidiotype vaccines. Another approach is to use tumor cells from the subject to be treated, or a derivative of such cells (reviewed by Schirrmacher et al. (1995) J. Cancer Res. Clin. Oncol. 121 :487). In U.S. Pat. No. 5,484,596, Hanna Jr. et al. claim a method for treating a resectable carcinoma to prevent recurrence or metastases, comprising surgically removing the tumor, dispersing the cells with collagenase, irradiating the cells, and vaccinating the patient with at least three consecutive doses of about 107 cells.
It will be appreciated that the compounds of the invention may advantageously be used in conjunction with one or more adjunctive therapeutic agents. Examples of suitable agents for adjunctive therapy include a 5HTi agonist, such as a triptan (e.g. sumatriptan or naratriptan); an adenosine Al agonist; an EP ligand; an NMDA modulator, such as a glycine antagonist; a sodium channel blocker (e.g. lamotrigine); a substance P antagonist (e.g. an NKi antagonist); a cannabinoid; acetaminophen or phenacetin; a 5-lipoxygenase inhibitor; a leukotriene receptor antagonist; a DMARD (e.g. methotrexate); gabapentin and related compounds; a tricyclic antidepressant (e.g. amitryptilline); a neurone stabilising antiepileptic drug; a mono-aminergic uptake inhibitor (e.g. venlafaxine); a matrix metalloproteinase inhibitor; a nitric oxide synthase (NOS) inhibitor, such as an iNOS or an nNOS inhibitor; an inhibitor of the release, or action, of tumour necrosis factor .alpha.; an antibody therapy, such as a monoclonal antibody therapy; an antiviral agent, such as a nucleoside inhibitor (e.g. lamivudine) or an immune system modulator (e.g. interferon); an opioid analgesic; a local anaesthetic; a stimulant, including caffeine; an H2-antagonist (e.g. ranitidine); a proton pump inhibitor (e.g. omeprazole); an antacid (e.g. aluminium or magnesium hydroxide; an antiflatulent (e.g. simethicone); a decongestant (e.g. phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pseudoephedrine, oxymetazoline, epinephrine, naphazoline, xylometazoline, propylhexedrine, or levo-desoxyephedrine); an antitussive (e.g. codeine, hydrocodone, carmiphen, carbetapentane, or dextramethorphan); a diuretic; or a sedating or non-sedating antihistamine. Matrix metalloproteinases (MMPs) are a family of zinc-dependent neutral endopeptidases collectively capable of degrading essentially all matrix components. Over 20 MMP modulating agents are in pharmaceutical develop, almost half of which are indicated for cancer. The University of Toronto researchers have reported that HDACs regulate MMP expression and activity in 3T3 cells. In particular, inhibition of HDAC by trichostatin A (TSA), which has been shown to prevent tumorigenesis and metastasis, decreases mRNA as well as zymographic activity of gelatinase A (MMP2; Type IV collagenase), a matrix metalloproteinase, which is itself, implicated in tumorigenesis and metastasis (Ailenberg M., Silverman M., Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 2002 , 298: 110-115). Another recent article that discusses the relationship of HDAC and MMPs can be found in Young D.A., et al., Arthritis Research & Therapy, 2005, 7: 503. Furthermore, the commonality between HDAC and MMPs inhibitors is their zinc-binding functionality. Therefore, in one aspect of the invention, compounds of the invention can be used as MMP inhibitors and may be of use in the treatment of disorders relating to or associated with dysregulation of MMP. The overexpression and activation of MMPs are known to induce tissue destruction and are also associated with a number of specific diseases including rheumatoid arthritis, periodontal disease, cancer and atherosclerosis. The compounds may also be used in the treatment of a disorder involving, relating to or, associated with dysregulation of histone deacetylase (HDAC). There are a number of disorders that have been implicated by or known to be mediated at least in part by HDAC activity, where HDAC activity is known to play a role in triggering disease onset, or whose symptoms are known or have been shown to be alleviated by HDAC inhibitors. Disorders of this type that would be expected to be amenable to treatment with the compounds of the invention include the following but not limited to: Anti-proliferative disorders (e.g. cancers); Neurodegenerative diseases including Huntington's Disease, Polyglutamine disease, Parkinson's Disease, Alzheimer's Disease, Seizures, Striatonigral degeneration, Progressive supranuclear palsy, Torsion dystonia, Spasmodic torticollis and dyskinesis, Familial tremor, Gilles de Ia Tourette syndrome, Diffuse Lewy body disease, Progressive supranuclear palsy, Pick's disease, intracerebral hemorrhage, Primary lateral sclerosis, Spinal muscular atrophy, Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Hypertrophic interstitial polyneuropathy, Retinitis pigmentosa, Hereditary optic atrophy, Hereditary spastic paraplegia, Progressive ataxia and Shy-Drager syndrome;
Metabolic diseases including Type 2 diabetes; Degenerative Diseases of the Eye including Glaucoma, Age-related macular degeneration, Rubeotic glaucoma; Inflammatory diseases and/or Immune system disorders including Rheumatoid Arthritis (RA), Osteoarthritis, Juvenile chronic arthritis, Graft versus Host disease, Psoriasis, Asthma, Spondyloarthropathy, Crohn's Disease, inflammatory bowel disease Colitis Ulcerosa, Alcoholic hepatitis, Diabetes, Sjoegrens's syndrome, Multiple Sclerosis, Ankylosing spondylitis, Membranous glomerulopathy, Discogenic pain, Systemic Lupus Erythematosus; Disease involving angiogenesis including cancer, psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis; Psychological disorders including bipolar disease, schizophrenia, mania, depression and dementia; Cardiovascular Diseases including heart failure, restenosis and arteriosclerosis; Fibrotic diseases including liver fibrosis, cystic fibrosis and angiofibroma; Infectious diseases including Fungal infections, such as Candida Albicans, Bacterial infections, Viral infections, such as Herpes Simplex, Protozoal infections, such as Malaria,
Leishmania infection, Trypanosoma brucei infection, Toxoplasmosis and coccidlosis and Haematopoietic disorders including thalassemia, anemia and sickle cell anemia.
In one embodiment, compounds of the invention can be used to induce or inhibit apoptosis, a physiological cell death process critical for normal development and homeostasis. Alterations of apoptotic pathways contribute to the pathogenesis of a variety of human diseases. Compounds of the invention, as modulators of apoptosis, will be useful in the treatment of a variety of human diseases with aberrations in apoptosis including cancer (particularly, but not limited to, follicular lymphomas, carcinomas with p53 mutations, hormone dependent tumors of the breast, prostate and ovary, and precancerous lesions such as familial adenomatous polyposis), viral infections (including, but not limited to, herpes virus, poxvirus, Epstein-Barr virus, Sindbis virus and adenovirus), autoimmune diseases (including, but not limited to, systemic lupus, erythematosus, immune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, inflammatory bowel diseases, and autoimmune diabetes mellitus), neurodegenerative disorders (including, but not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy and cerebellar degeneration), AIDS, myelodysplastic syndromes, aplastic anemia, ischemic injury associated myocardial infarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis, toxin-induced or alcohol induced liver diseases, hematological diseases (including, but not limited to, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia), degenerative diseases of the musculoskeletal system (including, but not limited to, osteoporosis and arthritis), aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiple sclerosis, kidney diseases, and cancer pain. In one aspect, the invention provides the use of compounds of the invention for the treatment and/or prevention of immune response or immune -mediated responses and diseases, such as the prevention or treatment of rejection following transplantation of synthetic or organic grafting materials, cells, organs or tissue to replace all or part of the function of tissues, such as heart, kidney, liver, bone marrow, skin, cornea, vessels, lung, pancreas, intestine, limb, muscle, nerve tissue, duodenum, small-bowel, pancreatic-islet-cell, including xeno-transplants, etc.; to treat or prevent graft-versus-host disease, autoimmune diseases, such as rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, thyroiditis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, type I diabetes uveitis, juvenile-onset or recent-onset diabetes mellitus, uveitis, Graves disease, psoriasis, atopic dermatitis, Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, vasculitis, auto-antibody mediated diseases, aplastic anemia, Evan's syndrome, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, and the like; and further to treat infectious diseases causing aberrant immune response and/or activation, such as traumatic or pathogen induced immune disregulation, including for example, that which are caused by hepatitis B and C infections, HIV, staphylococcus aureus infection, viral encephalitis, sepsis, parasitic diseases wherein damage is induced by an inflammatory response (e.g., leprosy); and to prevent or treat circulatory diseases, such as arteriosclerosis, atherosclerosis, vasculitis, polyarteritis nodosa and myocarditis. In addition, the present invention may be used to prevent/suppress an immune response associated with a gene therapy treatment, such as the introduction of foreign genes into autologous cells and expression of the encoded product. Thus in one embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating an immune response disease or disorder or an immune-mediated response or disorder in a subject in need of treatment comprising administering to said subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention.
In one aspect, the invention provides the use of compounds of the invention in the treatment of a variety of neurodegenerative diseases, a non-exhaustive list of which includes: I. Disorders characterized by progressive dementia in the absence of other prominent neurologic signs, such as Alzheimer's disease; Senile dementia of the Alzheimer type; and Pick's disease (lobar atrophy); II. Syndromes combining progressive dementia with other prominent neurologic abnormalities such as A) syndromes appearing mainly in adults (e.g., Huntington's disease, Multiple system atrophy combining dementia with ataxia and/or manifestations of Parkinson's disease, Progressive supranuclear palsy (Steel-Richardson-Olszewski), diffuse Lewy body disease, and corticodentatonigral degeneration); and B) syndromes appearing mainly in children or young adults (e.g., Hallervorden-Spatz disease and progressive familial myoclonic epilepsy); III. Syndromes of gradually developing abnormalities of posture and movement such as paralysis agitans (Parkinson's disease), striatonigral degeneration, progressive supranuclear palsy, torsion dystonia (torsion spasm; dystonia musculorum deformans), spasmodic torticollis and other dyskinesis, familial tremor, and Gilles de Ia Tourette syndrome; IV. Syndromes of progressive ataxia such as cerebellar degenerations (e.g., cerebellar cortical degeneration and olivopontocerebellar atrophy (OPCA)); and spinocerebellar degeneration (Friedreich's atazia and related disorders); V. Syndrome of central autonomic nervous system failure (Shy-Drager syndrome); VI. Syndromes of muscular weakness and wasting without sensory changes (motorneuron disease such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, spinal muscular atrophy (e.g., infantile spinal muscular atrophy (Werdnig-Hoffman), juvenile spinal muscular atrophy (Wohlfart-
Kugelberg-Welander) and other forms of familial spinal muscular atrophy), primary lateral sclerosis, and hereditary spastic paraplegia; VII. Syndromes combining muscular weakness and wasting with sensory changes (progressive neural muscular atrophy; chronic familial polyneuropathies) such as peroneal muscular atrophy (Charcot-Marie-Tooth), hypertrophic interstitial polyneuropathy (Dejerine-Sottas), and miscellaneous forms of chronic progressive neuropathy; VIII Syndromes of progressive visual loss such as pigmentary degeneration of the retina (retinitis pigmentosa), and hereditary optic atrophy (Leber's disease). Furthermore, compounds of the invention can be implicated in chromatin remodeling. The invention encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of the invention as described above. The invention also encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising hydrates of the compounds of the invention. The term "hydrate" includes but is not limited to hemihydrate, monohydrate, dihydrate, trihydrate and the like. The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions comprising any solid or liquid physical form of the compound of the invention. For example, the compounds can be in a crystalline form, in amorphous form, and have any particle size. The particles may be micronized, or may be agglomerated, particulate granules, powders, oils, oily suspensions or any other form of solid or liquid physical form.
The compounds of the invention, and derivatives, fragments, analogs, homo logs, pharmaceutically acceptable salts or hydrate thereof can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient. Such compositions typically comprise a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds above, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Preferably, the effective amount when treating cancer is an amount effective to selectively induce terminal differentiation of suitable neoplastic cells and less than an amount which causes toxicity in a patient. Compounds of the invention may be administered by any suitable means, including, without limitation, parenteral, intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, implantation, oral, sublingual, buccal, nasal, pulmonary, transdermal, topical, vaginal, rectal, and transmucosal administrations or the like. Topical administration can also involve the use of transdermal administration such as transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices. Pharmaceutical preparations include a solid, semisolid or liquid preparation (tablet, pellet, troche, capsule, suppository, cream, ointment, aerosol, powder, liquid, emulsion, suspension, syrup, injection etc.) containing a compound of the invention as an active ingredient, which is suitable for selected mode of administration. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions are administered orally, and are thus formulated in a form suitable for oral administration, i.e., as a solid or a liquid preparation. Suitable solid oral formulations include tablets, capsules, pills, granules, pellets, sachets and effervescent, powders, and the like. Suitable liquid oral formulations include solutions, suspensions, dispersions, emulsions, oils and the like. In one embodiment of the present invention, the composition is formulated in a capsule. In accordance with this embodiment, the compositions of the present invention comprise in addition to the active compound and the inert carrier or diluent, a hard gelatin capsule.
Any inert excipient that is commonly used as a carrier or diluent may be used in the formulations of the present invention, such as for example, a gum, a starch, a sugar, a cellulosic material, an acrylate, or mixtures thereof. A preferred diluent is microcrystalline cellulose. The compositions may further comprise a disintegrating agent (e.g., croscarmellose sodium) and a lubricant (e.g., magnesium stearate), and may additionally comprise one or more additives selected from a binder, a buffer, a protease inhibitor, a surfactant, a solubilizing agent, a plasticizer, an emulsifϊer, a stabilizing agent, a viscosity increasing agent, a sweetener, a film forming agent, or any combination thereof. Furthermore, the compositions of the present invention may be in the form of controlled release or immediate release formulations. For liquid formulations, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers may be aqueous or non-aqueous solutions, suspensions, emulsions or oils. Examples of non-aqueous solvents are propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Aqueous carriers include water, alcoholic/aqueous solutions, emulsions or suspensions, including saline and buffered media. Examples of oils are those of petroleum, animal, vegetable, or synthetic origin, for example, peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, olive oil, sunflower oil, and fish- liver oil. Solutions or suspensions can also include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA); buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates, and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
In addition, the compositions may further comprise binders (e.g., acacia, cornstarch, gelatin, carbomer, ethyl cellulose, guar gum, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, povidone), disintegrating agents (e.g., cornstarch, potato starch, alginic acid, silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, guar gum, sodium starch glycolate, Primogel), buffers (e.g., tris-HCL, acetate, phosphate) of various pH and ionic strength, additives such as albumin or gelatin to prevent absorption to surfaces, detergents (e.g., Tween 20, Tween 80, Pluronic F68, bile acid salts), protease inhibitors, surfactants (e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate), permeation enhancers, solubilizing agents (e.g., glycerol, polyethylene glycerol, cyclodextrins), a glidant (e.g., colloidal silicon dioxide), anti-oxidants (e.g., ascorbic acid, sodium metabisulfite, butylated hydroxyanisole), stabilizers (e.g., hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), viscosity increasing agents (e.g., carbomer, colloidal silicon dioxide, ethyl cellulose, guar gum), sweeteners (e.g., sucrose, aspartame, citric acid), flavoring agents (e.g., peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring), preservatives (e.g., Thimerosal, benzyl alcohol, parabens), lubricants (e.g., stearic acid, magnesium stearate, polyethylene glycol, sodium lauryl sulfate), flow-aids (e.g., colloidal silicon dioxide), plasticizers (e.g., diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate), emulsifϊers (e.g., carbomer, hydroxypropyl cellulose, sodium lauryl sulfate), polymer coatings (e.g., poloxamers or poloxamines), coating and film forming agents (e.g., ethyl cellulose, acrylates, polymethacrylates) and/or adjuvants.
In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat No. 4,522,811. It is especially advantageous to formulate oral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals. The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
Daily administration may be repeated continuously for a period of several days to several years. Oral treatment may continue for between one week and the life of the patient. Preferably the administration may take place for five consecutive days after which time the patient can be evaluated to determine if further administration is required. The administration can be continuous or intermittent, e.g., treatment for a number of consecutive days followed by a rest period. The compounds of the present invention may be administered intravenously on the first day of treatment, with oral administration on the second day and all consecutive days thereafter.
The preparation of pharmaceutical compositions that contain an active component is well understood in the art, for example, by mixing, granulating, or tablet- forming processes. The active therapeutic ingredient is often mixed with excipients that are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the active ingredient. For oral administration, the active agents are mixed with additives customary for this purpose, such as vehicles, stabilizers, or inert diluents, and converted by customary methods into suitable forms for administration, such as tablets, coated tablets, hard or soft gelatin capsules, aqueous, alcoholic or oily solutions and the like as detailed above.
The amount of the compound administered to the patient is less than an amount that would cause toxicity in the patient. In certain embodiments, the amount of the compound that is administered to the patient is less than the amount that causes a concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma to equal or exceed the toxic level of the compound. Preferably, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 10 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 25 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 50 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 100 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 500 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 1000 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 2500 nM. In one embodiment, the concentration of the compound in the patient's plasma is maintained at about 5000 nM. The optimal amount of the compound that should be administered to the patient in the practice of the present invention will depend on the particular compound used and the type of cancer being treated. DEFINITIONS
Listed below are definitions of various terms used to describe this invention. These definitions apply to the terms as they are used throughout this specification and claims, unless otherwise limited in specific instances, either individually or as part of a larger group.
An "aliphatic group" or "aliphatic" is non-aromatic moiety that may be saturated (e.g. single bond) or contain one or more units of unsaturation, e.g., double and/or triple bonds. An aliphatic group may be straight chained, branched or cyclic, contain carbon, hydrogen or, optionally, one or more heteroatoms and may be substituted or unsubstituted. An aliphatic group, when used as a linker, preferably contains between about 1 and about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 4 to about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 4-12 atoms, more typically between about 4 and about 8 atoms. An aliphatic group, when used as a substituent, preferably contains between about 1 and about 24 atoms, more preferably between about 1 to about 10 atoms, more preferably between about 1-8 atoms, more typically between about 1 and about 6 atoms. In addition to aliphatic hydrocarbon groups, aliphatic groups include, for example, polyalkoxyalkyls, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines, for example. Such aliphatic groups may be further substituted. It is understood that aliphatic groups may include alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl groups described herein.
The term "substituted carbonyl" includes compounds and moieties which contain a carbon connected with a double bond to an oxygen atom, and tautomeric forms thereof. Examples of moieties that contain a substituted carbonyl include aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, amides, esters, anhydrides, etc. The term "carbonyl moiety" refers to groups such as "alkylcarbonyl" groups wherein an alkyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, "alkenylcarbonyl" groups wherein an alkenyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, "alkynylcarbonyl" groups wherein an alkynyl group is covalently bound to a carbonyl group, "arylcarbonyl" groups wherein an aryl group is covalently attached to the carbonyl group. Furthermore, the term also refers to groups wherein one or more heteroatoms are covalently bonded to the carbonyl moiety. For example, the term includes moieties such as, for example, aminocarbonyl moieties, (wherein a nitrogen atom is bound to the carbon of the carbonyl group, e.g., an amide).
The term "acyl" refers to hydrogen, alkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated cycloalkyl, partially saturated or fully saturated heterocycle, aryl, and heteroaryl substituted carbonyl groups. For example, acyl includes groups such as (Ci-Ce)alkanoyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, valeryl, caproyl, t- butylacetyl, etc.), (C3-C6)cycloalkylcarbonyl (e.g., cyclopropylcarbonyl, cyclobutylcarbonyl, cyclopentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, etc.), heterocyclic carbonyl (e.g., pyrrolidinylcarbonyl, pyrrolid-2-one-5-carbonyl, piperidinylcarbonyl, piperazinylcarbonyl, tetrahydrofuranylcarbonyl, etc.), aroyl (e.g., benzoyl) and heteroaroyl (e.g., thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, thiophenyl-3 -carbonyl, furanyl-2-carbonyl, furanyl-3 -carbonyl, lH-pyrroyl-2-carbonyl, lH-pyrroyl-3 -carbonyl, benzo[b]thiophenyl-2-carbonyl, etc.). In addition, the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be any one of the groups described in the respective definitions. When indicated as being "optionally substituted", the acyl group may be unsubstituted or optionally substituted with one or more substituents (typically, one to three substituents) independently selected from the group of substituents listed below in the definition for "substituted" or the alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycle, aryl and heteroaryl portion of the acyl group may be substituted as described above in the preferred and more preferred list of substituents, respectively.
The term "alkyl" embraces linear or branched radicals having one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkyl radicals are "lower alkyl" radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are lower alkyl radicals having one to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl and the like.
The term "alkenyl" embraces linear or branched radicals having at least one carbon-carbon double bond of two to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, two to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkenyl radicals are "lower alkenyl" radicals having two to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably about two to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of alkenyl radicals include ethenyl, allyl, propenyl, butenyl and 4-methylbutenyl. The terms "alkenyl", and "lower alkenyl", embrace radicals having "cis" and "trans" orientations, or alternatively, "E" and "Z" orientations.
The term "alkynyl" embraces linear or branched radicals having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond of two to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, two to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkynyl radicals are "lower alkynyl" radicals having two to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably about two to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of alkynyl radicals include propargyl, 1- propynyl, 2-propynyl, 1-butyne, 2-butynyl and 1-pentynyl.
The term "cycloalkyl" embraces saturated carbocyclic radicals having three to about twelve carbon atoms. The term "cycloalkyl" embraces saturated carbocyclic radicals having three to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred cycloalkyl radicals are "lower cycloalkyl" radicals having three to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl.
The term "cycloalkenyl" embraces partially unsaturated carbocyclic radicals having three to twelve carbon atoms. Cycloalkenyl radicals that are partially unsaturated carbocyclic radicals that contain two double bonds (that may or may not be conjugated) can be called "cycloalkyldienyl". More preferred cycloalkenyl radicals are "lower cycloalkenyl" radicals having four to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl. The term "alkoxy" embraces linear or branched oxy-containing radicals each having alkyl portions of one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkoxy radicals are "lower alkoxy" radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms and more preferably having one to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy and tert-butoxy.
The term "alkoxyalkyl" embraces alkyl radicals having one or more alkoxy radicals attached to the alkyl radical, that is, to form monoalkoxyalkyl and dialkoxyalkyl radicals.
The term "aryl", alone or in combination, means a carbocyclic aromatic system containing one, two or three rings wherein such rings may be attached together in a pendent manner or may be fused. The term "aryl" embraces aromatic radicals such as phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indane and biphenyl.
The terms "heterocyclyl", "heterocycle" "heterocyclic" or "heterocyclo" embrace saturated, partially unsaturated and unsaturated heteroatom-containing ring- shaped radicals, which can also be called "heterocyclyl", "heterocycloalkenyl" and "heteroaryl" correspondingly, where the heteroatoms may be selected from nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen. Examples of saturated heterocyclyl radicals include saturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms (e.g. pyrrolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidino, piperazinyl, etc.); saturated 3 to 6- membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 oxygen atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms (e.g. morpholinyl, etc.); saturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms (e.g., thiazolidinyl, etc.). Examples of partially unsaturated heterocyclyl radicals include dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran, dihydrofuran and dihydrothiazole.
Heterocyclyl radicals may include a pentavalent nitrogen, such as in tetrazolium and pyridinium radicals. The term "heterocycle" also embraces radicals where heterocyclyl radicals are fused with aryl or cycloalkyl radicals. Examples of such fused bicyclic radicals include benzofuran, benzothiophene, and the like. The term "heteroaryl" embraces unsaturated heterocyclyl radicals. Examples of heteroaryl radicals include unsaturated 3 to 6 membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 4 nitrogen atoms, for example, pyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazolyl (e.g., 4H- 1,2,4- triazolyl, lH-l,2,3-triazolyl, 2H-l,2,3-triazolyl, etc.) tetrazolyl (e.g. lH-tetrazolyl, 2H-tetrazolyl, etc.), etc.; unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 5 nitrogen atoms, for example, indolyl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, tetrazolopyridazinyl (e.g., tetrazolo[l,5-b]pyridazinyl, etc.), etc.; unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing an oxygen atom, for example, pyranyl, furyl, etc.; unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing a sulfur atom, for example, thienyl, etc.; unsaturated 3- to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 oxygen atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, for example, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl, 1,2,5- oxadiazolyl, etc.) etc.; unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 2 oxygen atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms (e.g. benzoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, etc.); unsaturated 3 to 6-membered heteromonocyclic group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms, for example, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl (e.g., 1,2,4- thiadiazolyl, 1,3,4-thiadiazolyl, 1,2,5-thiadiazolyl, etc.) etc.; unsaturated condensed heterocyclyl group containing 1 to 2 sulfur atoms and 1 to 3 nitrogen atoms (e.g., benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, etc.) and the like.
The term "heterocycloalkyl" embraces heterocyclo-substituted alkyl radicals. More preferred heterocycloalkyl radicals are "lower heterocycloalkyl" radicals having one to six carbon atoms in the heterocyclo radicals. The term "alkylthio" embraces radicals containing a linear or branched alkyl radical, of one to about ten carbon atoms attached to a divalent sulfur atom. Preferred alkylthio radicals have alkyl radicals of one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkylthio radicals have alkyl radicals are "lower alkylthio" radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are alkylthio radicals having lower alkyl radicals of one to about eight carbon atoms. Examples of such lower alkylthio radicals are methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, butylthio and hexylthio.
The terms "aralkyl" or "arylalkyl" embrace aryl-substituted alkyl radicals such as benzyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, phenylethyl, and diphenylethyl.
The term "aryloxy" embraces aryl radicals attached through an oxygen atom to other radicals.
The terms "aralkoxy" or "arylalkoxy" embrace aralkyl radicals attached through an oxygen atom to other radicals. The term "aminoalkyl" embraces alkyl radicals substituted with amino radicals. Preferred aminoalkyl radicals have alkyl radicals having about one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred aminoalkyl radicals are "lower aminoalkyl" that have alkyl radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are aminoalkyl radicals having lower alkyl radicals having one to eight carbon atoms. Examples of such radicals include aminomethyl, aminoethyl, and the like.
The term "alkylamino" denotes amino groups which are substituted with one or two alkyl radicals. Preferred alkylamino radicals have alkyl radicals having about one to about twenty carbon atoms or, preferably, one to about twelve carbon atoms. More preferred alkylamino radicals are "lower alkylamino" that have alkyl radicals having one to about ten carbon atoms. Most preferred are alkylamino radicals having lower alkyl radicals having one to about eight carbon atoms. Suitable lower alkylamino may be monosubstituted N-alkylamino or disubstituted N,N-alkylamino, such as N-methylamino, N-ethylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino or the like.
The term "linker" means an organic moiety that connects two parts of a compound. Linkers typically comprise a direct bond or an atom such as oxygen or sulfur, a unit such as NR8, C(O), C(O)NH, SO, SO2, SO2NH or a chain of atoms, such as substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkynylarylalkyl, alkynylarylalkenyl, alkynylarylalkynyl, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroarylalkenyl, alkylheteroarylalkynyl, alkenylheteroarylalkyl, alkenylheteroarylalkenyl, alkenylheteroarylalkynyl, alkynylheteroarylalkyl, alkynylheteroarylalkenyl, alkynylheteroarylalkynyl, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkylhererocyclylalkynyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkylaryl, alkenylaryl, alkynylaryl, alkylheteroaryl, alkenylheteroaryl, alkynylhereroaryl, which one or more methylenes can be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S(O), SO2, N(R8), C(O), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where Rg is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic. In one embodiment, the linker B is between 1-24 atoms, preferably 4-24 atoms, preferably 4-18 atoms, more preferably 4-12 atoms, and most preferably about 4-10 atoms. In some embodiments, the linker is a C(O)NH(alkyl) chain or an alkoxy chain.
The term "substituted" refers to the replacement of one or more hydrogen radicals in a given structure with the radical of a specified substituent including, but not limited to: halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aralkoxy, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, haloalkyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, cyano, nitro, alkylamino, arylamino, alkylaminoalkyl, arylaminoalkyl, aminoalkylamino, hydroxy, alkoxyalkyl, carboxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aminocarbonylalkyl, acyl, aralkoxycarbonyl, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, sulfonyl, phosphonic acid, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and aliphatic. It is understood that the substituent may be further substituted.
For simplicity, chemical moieties are defined and referred to throughout can be univalent chemical moieties (e.g., alkyl, aryl, etc.) or multivalent moieties under the appropriate structural circumstances clear to those skilled in the art. For example, an "alkyl" moiety can be referred to a monovalent radical (e.g. CH3-CH2-), or in other instances, a bivalent linking moiety can be "alkyl," in which case those skilled in the art will understand the alkyl to be a divalent radical (e.g., -CH2-CH2-), which is equivalent to the term "alkylene." Similarly, in circumstances in which divalent moieties are required and are stated as being "alkoxy", "alkylamino", "aryloxy", "alkylthio", "aryl", "heteroaryl", "heterocyclic", "alkyl" "alkenyl", "alkynyl", "aliphatic", or "cycloalkyl", those skilled in the art will understand that the terms alkoxy", "alkylamino", "aryloxy", "alkylthio", "aryl", "heteroaryl", "heterocyclic", "alkyl", "alkenyl", "alkynyl", "aliphatic", or "cycloalkyl" refer to the corresponding divalent moiety.
The terms "halogen" or "halo" as used herein, refers to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
As used herein, the term "aberrant proliferation" refers to abnormal cell growth. The phrase "adjunctive therapy" encompasses treatment of a subject with agents that reduce or avoid side effects associated with the combination therapy of the present invention, including, but not limited to, those agents, for example, that reduce the toxic effect of anticancer drugs, e.g., bone resorption inhibitors, cardioprotective agents; prevent or reduce the incidence of nausea and vomiting associated with chemotherapy, radiotherapy or operation; or reduce the incidence of infection associated with the administration of myelosuppressive anticancer drugs.
The term "angiogenesis," as used herein, refers to the formation of blood vessels. Specifically, angiogenesis is a multi-step process in which endothelial cells focally degrade and invade through their own basement membrane, migrate through interstitial stroma toward an angiogenic stimulus, proliferate proximal to the migrating tip, organize into blood vessels, and reattach to newly synthesized basement membrane (see Folkman et al., Adv. Cancer Res., Vol. 43, pp. 175-203 (1985)). Anti-angiogenic agents interfere with this process. Examples of agents that interfere with several of these steps include thrombospondin-1, angiostatin, endostatin, interferon alpha and compounds such as matrix metalloproteinase
(MMP) inhibitors that block the actions of enzymes that clear and create paths for newly forming blood vessels to follow; compounds, such as .alpha.v.beta.3 inhibitors, that interfere with molecules that blood vessel cells use to bridge between a parent blood vessel and a tumor; agents, such as specific COX-2 inhibitors, that prevent the growth of cells that form new blood vessels; and protein-based compounds that simultaneously interfere with several of these targets.
The term "apoptosis" as used herein refers to programmed cell death as signaled by the nuclei in normally functioning human and animal cells when age or state of cell health and condition dictates. An "apoptosis inducing agent" triggers the process of programmed cell death.
The term "cancer" as used herein denotes a class of diseases or disorders characterized by uncontrolled division of cells and the ability of these cells to invade other tissues, either by direct growth into adjacent tissue through invasion or by implantation into distant sites by metastasis.
The term "compound" is defined herein to include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, hydrates, polymorphs, enantiomers, diastereoisomers, racemates and the like of the compounds having a formula as set forth herein.
The term "devices" refers to any appliance, usually mechanical or electrical, designed to perform a particular function.
As used herein, the term "dysplasia" refers to abnormal cell growth, and typically refers to the earliest form of pre-cancerous lesion recognizable in a biopsy by a pathologist.
The term "hyperplasia," as used herein, refers to excessive cell division or growth.
The phrase an "immunotherapeutic agent" refers to agents used to transfer the immunity of an immune donor, e.g., another person or an animal, to a host by inoculation. The term embraces the use of serum or gamma globulin containing performed antibodies produced by another individual or an animal; nonspecific systemic stimulation; adjuvants; active specific immunotherapy; and adoptive immunotherapy. Adoptive immunotherapy refers to the treatment of a disease by therapy or agents that include host inoculation of sensitized lymphocytes, transfer factor, immune RNA, or antibodies in serum or gamma globulin.
The term "inhibition," in the context of neoplasia, tumor growth or tumor cell growth, may be assessed by delayed appearance of primary or secondary tumors, slowed development of primary or secondary tumors, decreased occurrence of primary or secondary tumors, slowed or decreased severity of secondary effects of disease, arrested tumor growth and regression of tumors, among others. In the extreme, complete inhibition, is referred to herein as prevention or chemoprevention.
The term "metastasis," as used herein, refers to the migration of cancer cells from the original tumor site through the blood and lymph vessels to produce cancers in other tissues. Metastasis also is the term used for a secondary cancer growing at a distant site.
The term "neoplasm," as used herein, refers to an abnormal mass of tissue that results from excessive cell division. Neoplasms may be benign (not cancerous), or malignant (cancerous) and may also be called a tumor. The term "neoplasia" is the pathological process that results in tumor formation.
As used herein, the term "pre-cancerous" refers to a condition that is not malignant, but is likely to become malignant if left untreated.
The term "proliferation" refers to cells undergoing mitosis.
The phrase a "radio therapeutic agent" refers to the use of electromagnetic or particulate radiation in the treatment of neoplasia.
The term "recurrence" as used herein refers to the return of cancer after a period of remission. This may be due to incomplete removal of cells from the initial cancer and may occur locally (the same site of initial cancer), regionally (in vicinity of initial cancer, possibly in the lymph nodes or tissue), and/or distally as a result of metastasis.
The term "treatment" refers to any process, action, application, therapy, or the like, wherein a mammal, including a human being, is subject to medical aid with the object of improving the mammal's condition, directly or indirectly.
The term "vaccine" includes agents that induce the patient's immune system to mount an immune response against the tumor by attacking cells that express tumor associated antigens (Teas).
As used herein, the term "effective amount of the subject compounds," with respect to the subject method of treatment, refers to an amount of the subject compound which, when delivered as part of desired dose regimen, brings about, e.g. a change in the rate of cell proliferation and/or state of differentiation and/or rate of survival of a cell to clinically acceptable standards. This amount may further relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms of a neoplasia disorder, including, but is not limited to: 1) reduction in the number of cancer cells; 2) reduction in tumor size; 3) inhibition (i.e., slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) of cancer cell infiltration into peripheral organs; 4) inhibition (i.e., slowing to some extent, preferably stopping) of tumor metastasis; 5) inhibition, to some extent, of tumor growth; 6) relieving or reducing to some extent one or more of the symptoms associated with the disorder; and/or 7) relieving or reducing the side effects associated with the administration of anticancer agents.
As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge, et al. describes pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66: 1-19 (1977). The salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compounds of the invention, or separately by reacting the free base function with a suitable organic acid or inorganic acid. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic acid addition salts include, but are not limited to, salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid lactobionic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p- toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable ester" refers to esters which hydrolyze in vivo and include those that break down readily in the human body to leave the parent compound or a salt thereof. Suitable ester groups include, for example, those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable aliphatic carboxylic acids, particularly alkanoic, alkenoic, cycloalkanoic and alkanedioic acids, in which each alkyl or alkenyl moiety advantageously has not more than 6 carbon atoms. Examples of particular esters include, but are not limited to, formates, acetates, propionates, butyrates, acrylates and ethylsuccinates.
The term "pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs" as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible, of the compounds of the present invention. "Prodrug", as used herein means a compound which is convertible in vivo by metabolic means (e.g. by hydrolysis) to a compound of the invention. Various forms of prodrugs are known in the art, for example, as discussed in Bundgaard, (ed.), Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985); Widder, et al. (ed.), Methods in Enzymology, vol. 4, Academic Press (1985); Krogsgaard-Larsen, et al., (ed). "Design and Application of Prodrugs, Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Chapter 5, 113-191 (1991); Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Drug Deliver Reviews, 8:1-38(1992); Bundgaard, J. of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 et seq. (1988); Higuchi and Stella (eds.) Prodrugs as Novel Drug Delivery Systems, American Chemical Society (1975); and Bernard Testa & Joachim Mayer, "Hydrolysis In Drug And Prodrug Metabolism: Chemistry, Biochemistry And Enzymology," John Wiley and Sons, Ltd. (2002).
As used herein, "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration, such as sterile pyrogen-free water. Suitable carriers are described in the most recent edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, a standard reference text in the field, which is incorporated herein by reference. Preferred examples of such carriers or diluents include, but are not limited to, water, saline, finger's solutions, dextrose solution, and 5% human serum albumin. Liposomes and non-aqueous vehicles such as fixed oils may also be used. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
As used herein, the term "pre-cancerous" refers to a condition that is not malignant, but is likely to become malignant if left untreated. The term "subject" as used herein refers to an animal. Preferably the animal is a mammal. More preferably the mammal is a human. A subject also refers to, for example, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, guinea pigs, fish, birds and the like.
The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and may include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological system (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
The synthesized compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof. The compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, or as (D)- or (L)- for amino acids. The present invention is meant to include all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms. Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al, Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions (John Wiley & Sons, 1981). When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, other unsaturation, or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers and/or cis- and trans- isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included. The configuration of any carbon-carbon double bond appearing herein is selected for convenience only and is not intended to designate a particular configuration unless the text so states; thus a carbon-carbon double bond or carbon- heteroatom double bond depicted arbitrarily herein as trans may be cis, trans, or a mixture of the two in any proportion. Pharmaceutical Compositions The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient" means a non-toxic, inert solid, semi-solid or liquid filler, diluent, encapsulating material or formulation auxiliary of any type. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sugars such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; cyclodextrins such as alpha- (α), beta- (B) and gamma- (γ) cyclodextrins; starches such as corn starch and potato starch; cellulose and its derivatives such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; powdered tragacanth; malt; gelatin; talc; excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; oils such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; glycols such as propylene glycol; esters such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; agar; buffering agents such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; alginic acid; pyrogen-free water; isotonic saline; Ringer's solution; ethyl alcohol, and phosphate buffer solutions, as well as other non-toxic compatible lubricants such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, releasing agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the composition, according to the judgment of the formulator.
The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be administered orally, parenterally, by inhalation spray, topically, rectally, nasally, buccally, vaginally or via an implanted reservoir, preferably by oral administration or administration by injection. The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may contain any conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, adjuvants or vehicles. In some cases, the pH of the formulation may be adjusted with pharmaceutically acceptable acids, bases or buffers to enhance the stability of the formulated compound or its delivery form. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intracutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarticular, intraarterial, intrasynovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques.
Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions, may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S. P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables. The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
In order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution, which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the drug in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of drug to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or: a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, eye ointments, powders and solutions are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to the compounds of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons. Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
For pulmonary delivery, a therapeutic composition of the invention is formulated and administered to the patient in solid or liquid particulate form by direct administration e.g., inhalation into the respiratory system. Solid or liquid particulate forms of the active compound prepared for practicing the present invention include particles of respirable size: that is, particles of a size sufficiently small to pass through the mouth and larynx upon inhalation and into the bronchi and alveoli of the lungs. Delivery of aerosolized therapeutics, particularly aerosolized antibiotics, is known in the art (see, for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,767,068 to VanDevanter et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,269 to Smith et ah, and WO 98/43650 by Montgomery, all of which are incorporated herein by reference). A discussion of pulmonary delivery of antibiotics is also found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,014,969, incorporated herein by reference.
By a "therapeutically effective amount" of a compound of the invention is meant an amount of the compound which confers a therapeutic effect on the treated subject, at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.
The therapeutic effect may be objective (i.e., measurable by some test or marker) or subjective (i.e., subject gives an indication of or feels an effect). An effective amount of the compound described above may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, preferably from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Effective doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or contemporaneously with the specific compound employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts.
The total daily dose of the compounds of this invention administered to a human or other animal in single or in divided doses can be in amounts, for example, from 0.01 to 50 mg/kg body weight or more usually from 0.1 to 25 mg/kg body weight. Single dose compositions may contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. In general, treatment regimens according to the present invention comprise administration to a patient in need of such treatment from about 10 mg to about 1000 mg of the compound(s) of this invention per day in single or multiple doses.
The compounds of the formulae described herein can, for example, be administered by injection, intravenously, intraarterially, subdermally, intraperitoneally, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously; or orally, buccally, nasally, transmucosally, topically, in an ophthalmic preparation, or by inhalation, with a dosage ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg of body weight, alternatively dosages between 1 mg and 1000 mg/dose, every 4 to 120 hours, or according to the requirements of the particular drug. The methods herein contemplate administration of an effective amount of compound or compound composition to achieve the desired or stated effect. Typically, the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention will be administered from about 1 to about 6 times per day or alternatively, as a continuous infusion. Such administration can be used as a chronic or acute therapy. The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with pharmaceutically excipients or carriers to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. A typical preparation will contain from about 5% to about 95% active compound (w/w). Alternatively, such preparations may contain from about 20% to about 80% active compound.
Lower or higher doses than those recited above may be required. Specific dosage and treatment regimens for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health status, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity and course of the disease, condition or symptoms, the patient's disposition to the disease, condition or symptoms, and the judgment of the treating physician.
Upon improvement of a patient's condition, a maintenance dose of a compound, composition or combination of this invention may be administered, if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or frequency of administration, or both, may be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved condition is retained when the symptoms have been alleviated to the desired level. Patients may, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of disease symptoms.
Synthetic Methods
The compounds of formulae I and II, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, may be prepared by any process known to be applicable to the preparation of chemically-related compounds. Suitable processes for making certain intermediates include, for example, those illustrated in US Patent No. 7,074,800. Necessary starting materials may be obtained by standard procedures of organic chemistry. The preparation of such starting materials is described within the accompanying non-limiting Examples. Alternatively necessary starting materials are obtainable by analogous procedures to those illustrated which are within the ordinary skill of a chemist.
The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following representative synthetic schemes that illustrate the methods by which the compounds of the invention may be prepared, which are intended as an illustration only and not limiting of the scope of the invention.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000048_0001
112
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000049_0001
207 208
Figure imgf000049_0002
209
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000050_0001
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000050_0002
Scheme 5
Figure imgf000051_0001
501 502 503
Figure imgf000051_0002
504 505 506
Figure imgf000051_0003
DMF
Figure imgf000051_0005
Figure imgf000051_0004
Figure imgf000051_0006
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000052_0001
EXAMPLES
The compounds and processes of the present invention will be better understood in connection with the following examples, which are intended as an illustration only and not limiting of the scope of the invention. Various changes and modifications to the disclosed embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art and such changes and modifications including, without limitation, those relating to the chemical structures, substituents, derivatives, formulations and/or methods of the invention may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention and the scope of the appended claims.
EXAMPLE 1: Preparation of 7-(4-(benzofuran-5-ylamino)-7- methoxyquinazolin-6-yloxy)-7V- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 2) Step Ia. 2-Bromo-l-fluoro-4-nitrobenzene (Compound 102)
To a sulfuric acid ( 50ml ) solution of compound 101 (8.75 g, 500 mmol) was added 68% HNO3 (4 mL) in such a way that the temperature of the reaction was maintained below 40 0C. After the addition, the mixture was stirred at 20 0C for Ih. The mixture was diluted with 300 mL of ice-water and filtered. The collected solid was recrystallized from petroleum ester to yield the title compound 102 as a white solid (8.06 g, 73.3%): 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 8.6 (dd, IH), 8.3 (m, IH), 7.7 (t, IH). Step Ib. ((2-Fluoro-5-nitrophenyl)ethynyl)trimethylsilane (Compound 103)
A mixture of compound 102 (2.5 g, 11.4mmol), triphenylphosphine (0.114 g, 0.44 mmol), palladium (II) chloride (0.045g , 0.26mmol) and triethylamine ( 28ml) was stirred and heated to 100 0C under nitrogen for 16 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the precipitate was filtered. The solid was washed with triethylamine and the combined filtrate was evaporated to leave a dark brown oil which was distilled out at 120 0C under reduced pressure to gave compound 103 as a brown yellow solid (1.708 g, 63%): LCMS: 238 [M+l]+. Step Ic. 5-Nitrobenzofuran (Compound 104)
A mixture of compound 103 (7.30 g, 30.8 mmol), sodium acetate (10.1 g, 123 mmol) and N,N-dimethylformamide (70 mL) was stirred and heated to 100 0C for 16 hours. The precipitate was filtered and washed with N,N-dimethylformamide. The combined filtrate was evaporated to leave a residue which was purified through a short silica gel column (eluant: ethyl acetate/ petroleum ether = 1/10) to provide the title compound 104 as a brown solid (3.0 g, 60%). Step Id. Benzofuran-5 -amine (Compound 105)
A mixture of compound 104 (1.89 g, 11.63 mmol), iron powder (6.5 g,l 16mmol),36.5% HCl(ImI), ethanol (30 mL) and water (6 mL) was stirred and heated to 1000C for 3h. The precipitate was filtered and washed with ethanol. The combined filtrate was evaporated torn leave a residue which was dissolved in dichloromethane (50 mL). The organic layer was washed with aqueous NaHCO3 solution (20 mL><2) and brine (20 mLxl) and dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to give the title compound 105 as a brown solid (0.8 g, 51%): LC-
MS: 134 [M+ 1]+; 1H NMR(DMSO-J6): δ4.8 ( s, 2H ) , 6.57 ( m, IH ) , 6.67 ( m,
IH ) , 6.69 ( m, IH ) , 7.21 ( d, J= 9.3 Hz, IH ) , 7.74 ( d, J= 2.4 Hz, IH ) . Step Ie. 6, 7-Dimethoxyquinazolin-4 (3H)-one (Compound 107)
A mixture of compound 106 (2.1 g, 10 mmol), ammonium formate (0.63 g, 10 mmol) and formamide (7 mL) was stirred and heated to 190-200 0C for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the resulting precipitate was isolated, washed with water and dried to provide the title compound 107 as a brown solid (1.8 g, 84.7%): LCMS: 207 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 7.12 (s, IH), 7.43 (s, IH), 7.97 (s, IH), 12.08 (bs, IH).
Step If. 6-Hydroxy-7-methoxyquinazolin-4 (3H)-one methanesulfonate (Compound 108) Compound 107 (10.3 g, 50 mmol) was added portionwise to a stirred methanesulphonic acid (68 mL). L-Methionone (8.6 g, 57.5 mmol) was then added and the mixture was heated to 150-160 0C for 5 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured onto a mixture of ice and water (250 mL). The mixture was neutralized by the addition of aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (40%). The resulting precipitate was isolated, washed with water and dried to yield title compound 108 as a grey solid (1O g, crude): LCMS: 193 [M+ 1]+, 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 2.99 (s, 3H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 7.08 (s, IH), 7.36 (s, IH), 7.89 (s, IH), 9.83 (bs, IH), 11.86 (bs, IH). Step Ig. 7-Methoxy-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6-yl acetate (Compound 109) A mixture of compound 108 (10 g, crude), acetic anhydride (100 mL) and pyridine (8 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and poured into a mixture of ice and water (250 mL). The resulting precipitate was isolated and dried to yield the title product 109 as a grey solid (5.8 g, 50% two step overall yield): LCMS: 235 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 2.27 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 7.28 (s, IH), 7.72 (s, IH), 8.08 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, IH), 12.20 (bs, IH). Step Ih. 4-Chloro-7-methoxyquinazolin-6-yl acetate (Compound 110)
A mixture of compound 109 (2.0 g, 8.5 mmol) and phosphoryl trichloride (20 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours. When a clear solution was obtained, the excessive phosphoryl trichloride was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (50 mL) and the organic layer was washed with aqueous NaHCO3 solution (20 mL><2) and brine (20 mLxl) and dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to give the title product 110 as a yellow solid (1.4 g, 65%): LCMS: 253 [M+l]+. Step Ii. 4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-7-methoxyquinazolin-6-ol (Compound 111)
A mixture of compound 110 (0.151 g, O.βmmol) and 105 (0.20 g, 1.504 mmol) in isopropanol (2 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux over night. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered to give the title product 111 as a white solid (0.169g, 92%): LCMS: 308 [M+l]+.
Step Ij. Ethyl 7-(4-(benzofuran-5-ylamino)-7-methoxyquinazolin-6- yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 112-2)
A mixture of compound 111 (0.169 g, 0.55mmol), ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (0.13 g, 0.55 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.38g,2.75mmol) in N5N- dimethylformamide (5mL) was stirred at 6O0C for 3 hour. The precipitate was filtered and the filtrate was poured into water. The resulting precipitate was filtered, washed with ethyl acetate and dried to give the title compound 112-2 as a grey solid (0.207g, 81%).
Step Ik. 7-(4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-7-methoxyquinazolin-6-yloxy)-iV- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 2)
To a stirred solution of hydroxylamine hydrochloride (4.67 g, 67 mmol) in methanol (24 mL) at O0C was added a solution of potassium hydroxide (5.61 g, 100 mmol) in methanol (14 mL). After addition, the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at O0C, and was allowed to stand at low temperature. The resulting precipitate was isolated, and the solution was prepared to give free hydroxylamine.
The freshly prepared hydroxylamine solution (2.5 mL) was placed in 10 mL flask. Compound 112-2 (207mg, 0.45 mmol) was added to this solution and stirred at 25 0C for 0.5 hour. The mixture was neutralized with acetic acid, and the resulting precipitate was isolated, washed with water, and dried to give the title compound 2 as a white solid (97 mg, 48%): mp 191-195 0C, LCMS: 451 [M+ 1]+; 1H
NMR(DMSO-J6): δ 1.33 (m, 2H), 1.43 (m, 2H), 1.51 (m, 2H), 1.82 (m, 2H), 1.94 (m, 2H), 3.90 (s, 3H), 4.15 (m, 2H), 7.03 (m, IH), 7.22 (s, IH, 7.50 (m, IH, 7.70 (d, J= 2.7 Hz, IH, 7.90 (d, J= 2.1 Hz, IH, 8.03 (s, IH), 8.06 (d, J= 2.4 Hz, IH), 8.65 (s, IH), 8.71 (s, IH), 10.33 (s, IH), 10.84 (s, IH).
EXAMPLE 2: Preparation of 7-(4-(benzofuran-5-ylamino)-6- methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-7V-hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 6) Step 2a. Methyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-methoxybenzoate (Compound 202)
To a mixture of compound 201 (18.2 g, 0.1 mol), potassium carbonate (34.55 g, 0.25 mol) in N,N-dimethylformamide was added benzylbromide (14.5 ml, 0.105 mol) dropwise. The reaction was then heated to 60 0C and stirred for 2 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and was filtered. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate 500 mL. The organic layer was washed with water and brine (100 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to give the title compound 202 as a white solid (26 g, 95%): LCMS: 273 [M+l]+. Step 2b. Methyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-methoxy-2-nitrobenzoate (Compound 203)
A mixture of HNO3 (45 mL, 0.963 mol) and HOAc (45 mL) was placed in an ice- bath and stirred. Compound 202 (10.3 g, 50 mmol) in 200ml HOAc was added dropwise. After addition, the reaction mixture was stirred at -100C for 20min. The mixture was poured onto a mixture of ice and water (250 mL) and was neutralized by the addition of aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (40%). The precipitate was isolated by filtration, washed with water and dried to yield title compound 203 as a grey solid (30g, 98%): LCMS: 318 [M+l]+.
Step 2c. Methyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-methoxybenzoate (Compound 204) A mixture of compound 203 (10 g, crude), iron powder (54 g, 0.96mol), ethanol (100 mL), and H2O (20 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and neutralized with aqueous sodium hydroxide (10%). The reaction was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give a residue which was extracted with dichloromethane (200 mL x 2). The combined organic layer was washed with brine and dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to yield the title compound 204 as a grey solid (14.5 g, 85%): LCMS: 288 [M+l]+. Step 2d. 7-(Benzyloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-4(3H)-one (Compound 205)
A mixture of compound 204 (7.5 g, 25 mmol), ammonium formate (1.1 g, 22.4 mmol) and formamide (60 mL) was stirred and heated at 180-190 0C (oil bath temperature) for 2 hours. Then the mixture was cooled to room temperature and the resulting precipitate was isolated, washed with water and dried to give the title compound 205 as a brown solid (6.5 g, 95%): LCMS: 283 [M+l]+. Step 2e. 7-(Benzyloxy)-4-chloro-6-methoxyquinazoline (Compound 206)
A mixture of compound 205 (6.5g, 8.5 mmol) and phosphoryl trichloride (40 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours. When a clear solution was obtained, the excessive phosphoryl trichloride was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 mL) and the organic layer was washed with aqueous NaHCO3 solution (100 mL><3) and brine (100 mLx 1) and dried over MgSO4, filtered and evaporated to give the title compound 206 as a yellow solid (1.4 g, 65%): LCMS: 301[M+l]+.
Step 2f. Λ/-(Benzofuran-5-yl)-7-(benzyloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-4-amine (Compound 207)
A mixture of compound 206 (0.5 g, 1.5 mmol) and compound 105 (0.2 g, 1.5 mmol) in isopropanol (5 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 3 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered to give the title product 207 as a white solid (0.546g, 91%): LCMS: 398 [M+l]+. Step 2g. 4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-ol (Compound 208)
A mixture of compound 207 (0.51 g, 1.3 mmol) and Pd/C (0.2 g) in methanol (6 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 4 hour. The precipitate was isolated and dried to give the title compound 208 as a grey solid (0.4 g, 100%): LCMS: 308
[M+l]+. Step 2h. Ethyl 7-(4-(benzofuran-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 209-6)
A mixture of compound 208 (0.4 g, 1.3 mmol), ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (0.31 g,
1.3 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.89g) in N,N-dimethylformamide (15mL) was stirred at 6O0C for 3 hour. The precipitate was isolated by filtration and the filtrate was poured to water. The resulting solid was filtered, washed with ethyl acetate and dried to give the title compound 209-6 as a grey solid (0.6 g, 100%) :LC-
MS:464[M+1]+.
Step 2i. 7-(4-(Benzofuran-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-iV- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 6) The title compound 6 was prepared as a white solid (96 mg, 16%) from compound 209-6 (600mg, 1.3 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OHZMeOH (7.3 mL,
13 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): mp 214-2170C, LC-MS:451[M+l]+;1H NMR(DMSO-d6): δl.34 (m, 2H ) , 1.45 (m, 2H), 1.53 (m, 2H), 1.79 (m, 2H), 1.97 (m, 2H), 3.97 (s, 3H, 4.97(m, 2H), 7.00 (m, IH, 7.16 (s, IH), 7.58 (m, IH, 7.62 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, IH), 7.90 (s, IH), 8.00 (d, J= 2.1 Hz, IH), 8.07(d, J= 1.2 Hz, IH), 8.41 (s, IH), 8.67 (s, IH), 9.53 (s, IH), 10.34 (s, IH).
EXAMPLE 3: Preparation of 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6- methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-N- hydroxypentanamide (Compound 9) Step 3a: l-(2, 3-Difluoro-6-nitrophenyl)propan-2-one (Compound 302)
To a suspension of sodium hydride (5.42 g, 226 mmol) in THF (100 mL) was added ethyl acetoacetate (29.4 g, 226 mmol) while keeping the reaction temperature below 150C. The mixture was stirred for 15 min. after completion of addition. To the mixture a solution of compound 301 (20.0 g, 113 mmol) in THF (150 mL) was added while keeping the reaction temperature below 50C. The mixture was then stirred for 24 h at room temperature. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and 2N aqueous hydrochloric acid. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. To the residue was then added concentrated hydrochloric acid (400 mL) and acetic acid (300 mL) and the mixture was re fluxed for 12 h. After cooling, the mixture was concentrated and the residue was partitioned between 5% sodium hydrogen carbonate and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (EtO Ac/petroleum ether = 1/2) to give compound 302 (14.5 g, 60%) as a brown oil: LCMS: 216 [M+l]+. Step 3b: l-(2-Fluoro-3-hydroxy-6-nitrophenyl)propan-2-one (Compound 303) A mixture of 302 (4.30 g, 0.02 mol), AcONa (1.72 g, 0.021 mol) and DMF (40 mL) was stirred at 1000C for 12 h. The mixture was then filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (EtO Ac/petroleum ether = 1/1) to give compound 303 (2.3 g, 54%) as a pale yellow solid: LCMS: 214 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 2.30 (s, 3 H), 4.26 (s, 2 H), 7.67 (m, 1 H), 8.05 (m, 1 H). Step 3c: 4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ol (Compound 304)
A mixture of 303 (900 mg, 4.2 mmol), Pd/C (90 mg) and ethanol (20 mL) was stirred under H2 at ambient temperature for 8 h. The solvent was removed and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel (EtO Ac/petroleum ether = 1/15) to give the title compound 304 as a brown solid (120 mg, 17%):
LCMS: 166 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 2.34 (s, 3 H), 6.05 (s, 1 H), 6.64 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.86 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 8.70 (s, 1 H), 10.84 (s, 1 H). Step 3d: 7-(Benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6- methoxyquinazoline (Compound 305) A mixture of 206 (1.5 g, 5 mmol), 304 (0.99 g, 6 mmol), K2CO3 (1.38 g, 10 mmol) and DMF (30 mL) was stirred at 8O0C for 24 h. The mixture was filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated to give the title compound 305 as a brown solid (1.6 g, 75%): LCMS: 430 [M+l]+.
Step 3e: 4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-ol (Compound 306)
A mixture of compound 305 (1.6 g, 3.7 mmol), Pd/C (160 mg) and methanol (60 mL) was stirred under H2 at ambient temperature for 24 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated. The resulting solid was washed with ether, dried to give the title compound 306 as a brown solid (0.98 g, 81%): LCMS: 340 [M+l]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 2.42 (s, 3 H), 4.00 (s, 3 H), 6.25 (s, 1 H), 6.98 (m, 1 H), 7.15 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.23 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H), 8.43 (s, 1 H), 11.33 (s, 1 H). Step 3f: Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 307-9)
A mixture of compound 306 (300 mg, 0.88 mmol), K2CO3 (365 mg, 2.64 mmol) and DMF (10 mL) was stirred for 10 min followed by addition of methyl 5- bromopentanoate (202 mg, 1.06 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 8O0C for 3 h. The mixture was filtered and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated to give the title compound 307-9 as a brown solid (280 mg, 70%): LCMS: 454 [M+l]+. Step 3g: 5-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxylpent-anamide (Compound 9)
The title compound 9 (70 mg, 25%) was prepared as a pale brown solid from compound 307-9 (280 mg, 0.62 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 10 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 455 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 1.69 (m, 2 H), 1.79 (m, 2 H), 2.06 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 4.20 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 6.24 (s, IH), 6.99 (m, 1 H), 7.14 (m, IH), 7.39 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H), 8.50 (s, 1 H), 8.72 (s, 1 H), 10.40 (s, I H), 11.34 (s, 1 H).
EXAMPLE 4 : Preparation of 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6- methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 10)
Step 4a: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 307-10) The title compound 307-10 (330 mg, 68%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 306 (340 mg, 1 mmol) and ethyl 6-bromoheptanoate (268 mg, 1.2 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 482 [M+l]+. Step 4b: 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxy- hexanamide (Compound 10)
The title compound 10 (38 mg, 12%) was prepared as a pale brown solid from compound 307-10 (320 mg, 0.66 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 10 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 469 [M+l]+. 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) δ 1.44 (m, 2 H), 1.60 (m, 2 H), 1.82 (m, 2 H), 2.00 (m, 2 H), 2.41 (s, 3 H), 3.99 (s, 3 H), 4.20 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 6.24 (s, 1 H), 6.99 (m, 1 H), 7.14 (m, 1 H), 7.39 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H), 8.50 (s, 1 H), 8.70 (s, I H), 10.38 (s, I H), 11.35 (s, I H).
EXAMPLE 5: Preparation of 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6- methoxy quinazolin-7-yloxy)-N-hydroxyheptanamide (compound 11)
Step 5a: Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 307-11) The title compound 307-11 (310 mg, 82%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 306 (260 mg, 0.76 mmol) and ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (218 mg, 0.92 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 496 [M+l]+. Step 5b: 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyhept- anamide (Compound 11)
The title compound 11 (39 mg, 13%) was prepared as a pale brown solid from compound 307-11 (300 mg, 0.6 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 10 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 483 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 1.34 (m, 2 H), 1.44 (m, 4 H), 1.82 (m, 2 H), 1.97 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 2.42 (s, 3 H), 3.99 (s, 3 H), 4.20 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 6.24 (s, 1 H), 6.99 (m, 1 H), 7.15 (m, 1 H), 7.38 (s, 1 H), 7.60 (s, 1 H), 8.50 (s, 1 H), 8.66 (s, 1 H), 10.34 (s, 1 H), 11.34 (s, 1 H).
EXAMPLE 6: Preparation of 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6- methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-N- hydroxypentanamide (Compound 12) Step 6a: l-(3-Amino-2-fluoro-6-nitrophenyl)propan-2-one (Compound 401)
In a sealed tube a mixture of compound 302 (3.4 g, 15.8 mmol), 30% solution of liquid ammonia in MeOH (100 mL) and water (2 mL) was stirred at 8O0C for 6 h. The solvent was removed and the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give compound 401 (3.1 g, 92%) as a yellow solid: LCMS: 213 [M+ 1]+. Step 6b: 4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5 -amine (Compound 402) A mixture of compound 401 (2.94 mg, 13.8 mmol), Pd/C (290 mg) and ethanol
(80 mL) was stirred under H2 at ambient temperature for 4 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give the title compound 402 as a brown solid (2.1 g, 93%): LCMS: 165 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 2.29 (s, 3 H), 4.29 (s, 2 H), 5.94 (s, 1 H), 6.50 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.78 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 10.66 (s, 1 H).
Step 6c: 7-(Benzyloxy)-N-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yl)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 4-amine (Compound 403) A mixture of compound 206 (1.5 g, 5 mmol), 402 (821 mg, 5 mmol) and isopropanol (15 mL) was re fluxed for 1 h. The mixture was cooled to ambient temperature, filtered and dried to give the title compound 403 as a brown solid (1.91 g, 89%): LCMS: 429 [M+l]+. Step 6d: 4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-ol
(Compound 404)
A mixture of compound 403 (1.94 g, 4.17 mmol), Pd/C (200 mg) and methanol (100 mL) was stirred under H2 at ambient temperature for 48 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give the title compound 404 as a brown solid (1.36 g, 96%): LCMS: 339 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 2.42
(s, 3 H), 3.95 (s, 3 H), 6.22 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (m, 1 H), 7.13 (m, 2 H), 7.91 (s, 1 H), 8.20
(s, I H), 9.47 (s, I H), 11.33 (s, I H).
Step 6e: Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-
7-yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 405-12) The title compound 405-12 (151 mg, 33%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 404 (338 mg, 1 mmol) and methyl 5-bromopentanoate (214 mg, 1.1 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3):
LCMS: 453 [M+l]+.
Step 6f: 5 -(4-(4-Fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl- pentanamide (Compound 12)
The title compound 12 (103 mg, 69%) was prepared as a pale brown solid from compound 405-12 (151 mg, 0.33 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 8.85 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2
(Example 1): LCMS: 454 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 1.69 (m, 2 H), 1.78 (m, 2 H), 2.05 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.41 (s, 3 H), 3.93 (s, 3 H), 4.13 (t, J= 5.7 Hz, 2 H),
6.21 (s, 1 H), 7.00 (m, 1 H), 7.12 (m, 2 H), 7.85 (s, 1 H), 8.24 (s, 1 H), 9.38 (s, 1 H),
11.27 (s, I H).
EXAMPLE 7: Prepartion of 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6- methoxyquinazolin-7-yloxy)-N- hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 13)
Step 7a: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 7-yloxy) hexanoate (Compound 405-13) The title compound 405-13 (172 mg, 33%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 404 (372 mg, 1.1 mmol) and ethyl 6-bromohexanoate (269 mg, 1.2 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 481 [M+l]+. Step 7b: 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl-hexanamide (Compound 13)
The title compound (130 mg, 77%) was prepared as a pale yellow solid from compound 405-13 (172 mg, 0.35 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 8.85 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 468 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 1.42 (m, 2 H), 1.58 (m, 2 H), 1.79 (m, 2 H), 1.99 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.40 (s, 3 H), 3.92 (s, 3 H), 4.11 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 6.21 (s, 1 H), 6.99 (m, 1 H), 7.13 (m, 2 H), 7.83 (s, 1 H), 8.22 (s, 1 H), 8.68 (s, 1 H), 9.35 (s, 1 H), 10.35 (s, 1 H), 11.22 (s, 1 H).
EXAMPLE 8: Preparation of 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6- methoxy- quinazolin-7-yloxy)-N- hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 14) Step 8a: Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin- 7-yloxy)-heptanoate (Compound 405-14)
The title compound 405-14 (182 mg, 37%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 404 (338 mg, 1 mmol) and ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (261 mg, 1.1 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 495 [M+l]+.
Step 8b: 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7- yloxy)-N-hydroxyl- heptanamide (Compound 14) The title compound (160 mg, 90%) was prepared as a pale yellow solid from compound 405-14 (182 mg, 0.37 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (5 mL, 8.85 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 482 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 1.34 (m, 2 H), 1.43 (m, 2 H), 1.54 (m, 2 H), 1.80 (m, 2 H), 1.98 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.41 (s, 3 H), 3.94 (s, 3 H), 4.12 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 6.22 (s, 1 H), 7.01 (m, 1 H), 7.14 (m, 2 H), 7.85 (s, 1 H), 8.24 (s, 1 H), 8.68 (s, 1 H), 9.37 (s, 1 H), 10.35 (s, 1 H), 11.24 (s, 1 H). EXAMPLE 9: Preparation of 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-(3- (pyrrolidin- l-yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 16)
Step 9a: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-hydroxybenzoate (Compound 502) A mixture of ethyl 3, 4-dihydroxybenzoate (9.1 g, 50 mmol), benzyl chloride
(6.3 g, 50 mmol), KI (1.66 g, 10 mmol), and K2CO3 (13.8 g, 100 mmol) in acetonitrile (250 mL) was stirred at 4O0C overnight. The mixture was then cooled to room temperature and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated and the residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with petroleum ether/ ethyl acetate (10/1) to give the title compound 502 as a white solid (4.4 g, 33%): LCMS: 273 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 9.49 (s, 1 H), 7.35 (m, 7 H), 7.08 (d, J=7.8 Hz, IH), 5.16 (s, 2 H), 4.21 (m, 2 H), 1.26 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3 H). Step 9b: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)benzoate (Compound 503-16) The title compound 503-16 (6.7 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellowish oil from
502 (4.43 g, 16.3 mmol), ethyl 6-bromohexanoate (4.36 g, 19.5 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 437 [M+23]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6) : δ 7.53 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.44- 7.31 (m, 6 H), 7.14 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.17 (s, 2 H), 4.25 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.04-3.98 ( m, 4 H), 2.26 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.74-1.65 (m, 2 H), 1.59-1.52 (m, 2 H), 1.46-1.36 (m, 2 H), 1.28 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 1.14 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H). Step 9c: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)-2-nitrobenzoate (Compound 504-16)
To the solution of compound 503-16 (6.74 g, 16.3 mmol) in AcOH (8 mL) was added HNO3 (3.2 mL) in AcOH (7 mL) at O0C and stirred for 30 min. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature. The mixture was poured into ice-water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, saturated NaHCO3, brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated to give the title compound 504-16 as a yellow solid (7.5 g, 100%): LCMS: 460 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 7.73 (s, 1 H), 7.45- 7.34 (m, 5 H), 7.30 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.28 (q, J= 7.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.12 ( t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.00 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.27 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.79- 1.68 (m, 2 H), 1.63-1.52 (m, 2 H), 1.43-1.37 (m, 2 H), 1.24 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.14 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 3 H). Step 9d: Ethyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)benzoate (Compound 505-16)
A mixture of Compound 504-16 (6.3 g, 13.7 mmol), EtOH (50 mL), H2O (40 mL), and HCl (3.2 mL) was heated to a clear solution. To this clear solution was added Fe (4.4 g, 79 mmol). The resulting mixture was heated to reflux for 30 minutes. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and adjusted to pH 8 with 5 N NaOH. The mixture was heated to 6O0C, filtered quickly, and washed with hot EtOH twice. The filtrate was concentrated and the residue was extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated to give the title compound 505-16 as a yellow solid (5.7 g, 96%): LCMS: 430 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 7.44-7.31 (m, 4 H), 7.17 (s, 1 H), 6.40 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2 H), 5.05 (s, IH), 4.20 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 3.79 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 2.23 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 1.63-1.50 (m, 4 H), 1.41-1.33 (m, 2 H), 1.27 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.13 (t, (J= 6.6 Hz, 3 H). Step 9e: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 506-16)
A mixture of Compound 505-16 (5.7 g, 13.3 mmol), aminooxyformaldehyde (0.81 g, 13.3 mmol) in formamide (80 mL) was heated to 19O0C for 2h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the formamide was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was poured into ice-water. The resulting solid was collected by filtration, washed with water (3X), dried to give the title compound 506-16 as a brown solid (5.7 g, 95%): LCMS: 411 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 12.13 (brs, 1 H), 7.94 (s, 1 H), 7.47-7.32 (m, 6 H), 7.19 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.08- 3.97 (m, 4 H), 2.28 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 1.79-1.70 (m, 2 H), 1.63- 1.56 (m, 2 H), 1.51- 1.38 (m, 2 H), 1.14 ( t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H).
Step 9f: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-chloroquinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 507-16)
A mixture of compound 506-16 (4.2 g, 10.2 mmol) and phosphoryl trichloride (120 mL) was heated to reflux for 4 hours. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and phosphoryl trichloride was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2. The organic layer was washed with water, saturated NaHCO3, brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated to give the title compound 507-16 as a grey solid (2.4 g, 56%): LCMS: 429 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 8.83 (s, 1 H), 7.52-7.48 (m, 3 H) 7.42-7.36 (m, 4 H), 5.37 (s, 2 H), 4.18 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.02 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.28 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.84- 1.75 (m, 2 H), 1.65-1.55 (m, 2 H), 1.50-1.43 (m, 2 H), 1.13 (t, J= 6.9 z, 3 H). Step 9g: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)quinazolin- 6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 508-16)
A mixture of compound 507-16 (1.08 g, 2.52 mmol), K2CO3 (696 mg, 5.05mmol) and 4-fiuoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ol (500 mg, 3.02 mmol) in DMF (40 mL) was heated to 8O0C for 24 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was extracted with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with petroleum ether/ ethyl acetate (3/2) to give the title compound 508-16 as a brown foam (1.0 g, 71%): LCMS: 558 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 1.13 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 1.43- 1.49( m, 2 H), 1.58-1.63 (m, 2 H), 1.78-1.84 (m, 2 H), 2.28 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 4.01 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.19 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.37 (s, 2 H), 6.22 (s, 1 H), 6.95 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.12 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.33-7.52(m, 6 H), 7.61 (s, 1 H), 8.46 (s, 1 H), 11.33 (s, 1 H). Step 9h: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-hydroxyquinazolin-6- yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 509-16)
A mixture of compound 508-16 (1.0 g, 1.79 mmoL), 10% Pd/C (100 mg) in CH3OH (40 mL) was stirred under H2 at 150C for 24 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give the title compound 509-16 as a brown foam (800 mg, 96%): LCMS: 468 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 1.15 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 1.44-1.50 (m, 2 H), 1.58-1.65 (m, 2 H), 1.78-1.85 (m, 2 H), 2.30 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 4.02 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.16 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 6.22 (s, 1 H), 6.95 (t, J= 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.14 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (s, 1 H), 7.56 (s, 1 H), 8.40 (s, 1 H), 10.61 (s, 1 H), 11.30 (s, 1 H). Step 9i: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 510-16)
To a mixture of 509-16 (800 mg, 1.72 mmol), K2CO3 (475 mg, 3.44 mmol) and DMF (20 mL) was added l-(3-chloropropyl)pyrrolidine (302 mg, 2.06 mmol). The mixture was heated at 6O0C and stirred for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated to give the title compound 510-16 as a brown foam (630 mg, 63%): LCMS: 579 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 1.15 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 1.47 - 1.54 (m, 2 H), 1.59-1.71 (m, 6 H), 1.77-1.86 (m, 2 H), 1.97-2.04 (m, 2 H), 2.32 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 2.42 (s, 3 H), 2.50-2.59 (m, 4 H), 2.62 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.03 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.18 ( t, J = 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.25 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 6.24 (s, 1 H), 6.98 (t, J= 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.17 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, I H), 7.37 (s, 1 H), 7.59 (s, 1 H), 8.49 (s, 1 H), 11.36 (s, I H). Step 9j: 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-yloxy)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 16)
The title compound (20 mg, 10%) was prepared as a white solid from compound 510-16 (200 mg, 0.35 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (2 mL) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 566 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (CD3OD): δ 1.47-1.52 (m, 2 H), 1.52-1.70 (m, 2 H), 1.79-1.84 (m, 6 H), 2.04-2.10 (m, 4 H), 2.35 (s, 3 H), 2.68-2.77 (m, 4 H), 2.79 (t, J= 8.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.10 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.17 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 6.14 (s, 1 H), 6.84 (t, J= 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.03 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 7.55 (s, 1 H), 8.33 (s, 1 H).
EXAMPLE 10: Preparation of 7V-hydroxy-5-(4-(2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)- 7-(3-(pyrrolidin- l-yl)propoxy)qu-inazolin-6-yloxy)pentanamide (Compound
18)
Step 10a: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(5-methoxy-5-oxopentyloxy)benzoate (Compound
503-18)
The title compound 503-18 (1.5 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellow oil from compound 502 (1.0 g, 3.7 mmol), methyl 5-bromopentanoate (1.0 g, 4.4mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 307-9 (Example 3): LCMS: 437
[M+23]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 7.54 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.44- 7.33 (m, 6 H),
7.14 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.18 (s, 2 H), 4.25 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.01 ( t, J= 6.0 Hz,
2 H), 3.56 (s, 3 H), 2.33 (m, 2 H), 1.80-1.61 (m, 4 H), 1.28 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H). Step 10b: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-(5-methoxy-5-oxopentyloxy)-2-nitrobenzoate
(Compound 504-18)
The title compound 504-18 (1.2 g, 77%) was prepared as a yellow oil from compound 503-18 (1.4 g, 3.6 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 504-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 454 [M+23]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-/); δ 1.1 A (s, 1 H), 7.40 (m, 5 H), 7.31 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.27 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.14 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 3.55 (s, 3 H), 2.38 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.60-1.80 (m 4 H), 1.25 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3 H). Step 10c: Ethyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-(5-methoxy-5-oxopentyloxy)benzoate (Compound 505-18)
The title compound 505-18 (1.9 g, 74%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 504-18 (2.8 g, 6.6 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 505-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 402 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 7.42- 7.38 (m, 5 H), 7.17 (s, 1 H), 6.42 (s, 1 H), 6.41 (brs, 2 H), 5.05 (s, 2 H), 4.20 ( q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 3.80 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H) 3.55 (s, 3 H), 2.38 ( t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.38- 1.44 (m, 4 H), 1.26 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H).
Step 1Od: Methyl 5-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6- yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 506-18) The title compound 506-18 (1.2 g, 67%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 505-18 (1.9 g, 4.9 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 506-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 383 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6); δ 12.04 (s, 1 H), 7.94 (s, 1 H), 7.47-7.41 (m, 3 H), 7.38-7.32 (m, 3 H), 7.20 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.08 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.56 (s, 3 H), 2.38 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.79-1.70 (m, 4 H).
Step 1Oe: Methyl 5-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-chloroquinazolin-6-yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 507-18)
The title compound 507-18 (1.1 g, 88%) was prepared as a gray solid from compound 506-18 (1.2 g, 3.1 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 507-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 401 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/); δ 8.83 (s, 1 H), 7.51-7.48 (m, 3 H), 7.42-7.35 (m, 4 H), 5.37 (s, 2 H), 4.20 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, H), 3.55 (s, 3 H), 2.40 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.83-1.69 (m, 4 H). Step 1Of: Methyl 5-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5- ylamino)quinazolin-6-yloxy)- pentanoate (Compound 601-18) A mixture of compound 507-18 (500 mg, 1.25 mmol) and 4-fluoro-2-methyl- lH-indol-5 -amine (246 mg, 1.5 mmol) in isopropanol (20 mL) was stirred and heated to reflux for 2-3 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered, and washed with i-propanol. The solid was purified by column chromatography on silica gel eluting with petroleum ether/ethyl acetate (1/1) to give the title compound 601- 18 as a brown solid (173 mg, 37%): 1H NMR (DMSO-/): δ 11.22 (s, 1 H), 9.32 (s, 1 H), 8.20 (s, 1 H), 7.85 (s, 1 H), 7.48 (d, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 7.43- 7.32 (m, 4 H), 7.22 (s, 1 H), 7.10 (d, J= 9.6 Hz, 1 H), 6.97 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 5.29 (s, 2 H), 4.14 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 3.56 (s, 3 H), 2.44 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 2 H), 2.39 (m, 3 H), 1.73-1.82 (m, 4 H).
Step 1Og: Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7- hydroxyquinazolin-6-yloxy)-pentanoate (Compound 602-18) A mixture of compound 601-18 (170 mg, 0.33 mmoL), 10% Pd/C (17 mg) in CH3OH (5 mL) was stirred under H2 at 3O0C for 24 h. The mixture was filtered, concentrated to give the title compound as a green solid (140 mg, 98%): LCMS: 439 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): <5 11.2O (s, 1 H), 10.14 (brs, 1 H), 9.27 (s, 1 H), 8.16 (s, 1 H), 7.80 (s, 1 H), 7.12 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.01 (s, 1 H), 6.97 (t, J= 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s,l H), 4.11 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.58 (s, 3 H), 2.44 (s, 1 H), 2.39 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.95-1.72 (m, 4 H). Step 1Oh: Methyl 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)pentanoate (Compound 603-18)
To a mixture of 602-18 (140 mg, 0.32 mmol), K2CO3 (88 mg, 0.64 mmol) in DMF (12 mL) was added l-(3-chloropropyl)pyrrolidine (47 mg, 0.32 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at 6O0C for 3 h. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was partitioned between CH2Cl2 and water and the organic layer was separated, washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated to give the title compound 603-18 as a brown solid (70 mg, 40%): LCMS: 550 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): <511.22 (s, 1 H), 9.30 (s, 1 H), 8.19 (s, 1 H), 7.82 (s, I H), 7.10 (m, 2 H), 6.98 (t, J= 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 4.16-4.11 (m, 4 H), 3.57 (s, 3 H), 2.60 (m, 2 H), 2.58 (m, 4 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 1.98-1.93 (m, 2 H), 1.82-1.75 (m, 4 H), 1.68 (m, 4 H).
Step 1Oi: 5-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin- 6-yloxy)-N-hydroxypentanamide (compound 18) The title compound (40 mg, 61%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 603-18 (65 mg, 0.12 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (1.5 mL) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 551 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): «5 11.30 (s, 1 H), 10.48 (s, 1 H), 9.43 (s, I H), 8.24 (s, 1 H), 7.90 (s, 1 H), 7.18 (s, 1 H), 7.15 (d, J= 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.00 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.21 (s, 1 H), 4.24 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.14 (t, J= 6.0 Hz, 2 H), 3.30- 3.25 (m, 6 H), 2.41 (s, 3 H), 2.23 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.11-2.06 (m, 2 H), 1.95 (m, 4 H), 1.80-1.70 (m, 4 H).
EXAMPLE 11: 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 19) Step 11a: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)benzoate (compound 503-19)
The title compound 503-19 (6.7 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellow oil from compound 502 (4.43 g, 16.3 mmol) and ethyl 6-bromohexanoate (4.36 g, 19.5 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 503-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 437 [M+23]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/) : δ 7.53 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.44- 7.31 (m, 6 H), 7.14 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 5.17 (s, 2 H), 4.25 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 4.04-3.98 ( m, 4 H), 2.26 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.74-1.65 (m, 2 H), 1.59-1.52 (m, 2 H), 1.46-1.36 (m, 2 H), 1.28 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H), 1.14 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H).
Step lib: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)-2-nitrobenzoate (Compound 504-19)
The title compound 504-19 (7.5 g, 100%) was prepared as an orange solid from compound 503-19 (6.74 g, 16.3 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 507-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 460 [M+l]+; 1H NMR
(DMSO-/): δ 7.73 (s, 1 H), 7.45- 7.34 (m, 5 H), 7.30 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.28 (q, J= 7.0 Hz, 2 H), 4.12 ( t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.00 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.27 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.79-1.68 (m, 2 H), 1.63-1.52 (m, 2 H), 1.43-1.37 (m, 2 H), 1.24 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.14 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 3 H). Step lie: Ethyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-(6-ethoxy-6-oxohexyloxy)benzoate (Compound 505-19)
The title compound 505-19 (5.7 g, 96%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 504-19 (6.3 g, 13.7 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 505-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 430 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 7.44- 7.31 (m, 4 H), 7.17 (s, 1 H), 6.40 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 2 H), 5.05 (s, IH), 4.20 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 3.79 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 2.23 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 1.63-1.50 (m, 4 H), 1.41-1.33 (m, 2 H), 1.27 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.13 (t, (J= 6.6 Hz, 3 H). Step Hd: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 506-19)
The title compound 506-19 (5.7 g, 95%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 505-18 (5.7 g, 13.3 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 506-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 411 [M+l]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-/): δ 12.13 (brs, 1 H), 7.94 (s, 1 H), 7.47-7.32 (m, 6 H), 7.19 (s, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 4.08- 3.97 (m, 4 H), 2.28 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 1.79-1.70 (m, 2 H), 1.63- 1.56 (m, 2 H), 1.51-
1.38 (m, 2 H), 1.14 ( t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H).
Step He: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-chloroquinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 507-19)
The title compound 507-19 (2.4 g, 56%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 506-19 (4.2 g, 10.2 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 507-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 429 [M+l]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-/): δ 8.83 (s, 1 H), 7.52-7.48 (m, 3 H) 7.42-7.36 (m, 4 H), 5.37 (s, 2 H), 4.18 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.02 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.28 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 1.84-1.75 (m, 2 H), 1.65-1.55 (m, 2 H), 1.50-1.43 (m, 2 H), 1.13 (t, J= 6.9 z, 3 H). Step Hf: Ethyl 6-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5- ylamino)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 601-19)
The title compound 601-19 (183 mg, 100%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 507-19 (140 mg, 0.33 mmol) and 402 (64 mg, 0.39 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 601-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 557 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): δ 11.23 (s, 1 H), 9.33 (s, 1 H), 8.18 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (s, 1 H), 7.52-7.33 (m, 5 H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.10 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.98 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 6.18 (s, 1 H), 5.29 (s, 1 H), 4.12 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 4.01 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 2.30 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 2 H), 1.84- 1.78 (m, 2 H), 1.63-1.69 (m, 2 H), 1.49-
1.39 (m, 2 H), 1.13 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H).
Step Hg: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-7-hydroxyquinazolin- 6-yloxy)-hexanoate (Compound 602-19)
The title compound 602-19 (80 mg, 78%) was prepared as a green solid from compound 601-19 (124 mg, 0.22 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 602-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 467 [M+l]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-/): (Sl 1.26 (s, 1 H), 9.70 (s, 1 H), 8.27 (s, 1 H), 7.86 (s, 1 H), 7.14 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.07 (s, 1 H), 6.98 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.20 (s, 1 H), 4.10 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 4.02 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.34 (s, 3 H), 2.28 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 1.86-1.79 (m, 2 H), 1.66- 1.59 (m, 2 H), 1.49-1.44 (m, 2 H), 1.15 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H). Step Hh: Ethyl 6-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)hexanoate (Compound 603-19) The title compound 603-19 (75 mg, 40%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 602-19 (153 mg, 0.33 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 603-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 578 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): δ 11.22 (s, 1 H), 9.31 (s, 1 H), 8.20 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (s, 1 H), 7.12 (m, 2 H), 6.97 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 ), 4.15 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 4.11 ( t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 4.01 (q, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 2.62 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.38 (s, 3 H), 2.31 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2
H),1.98- 1.93 (m, 2 H), 1.82- 1.80 (m, 2 H), 1.69 - 1.47 (m, 6 H), 1.15 (t, J= 6.9 Hz,
3 H).
Step 1 Ii: 6-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl- lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin- 1 - yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyhexanamide (Compound 19 ) The title compound (40 mg, 59%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 603-19 (70 mg, 0.12 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (1.5 mL) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1): LCMS: 565 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): δ\ \25 (brs, 1 H), 9.36 (brs, 1 H), 8.20 (s, 1 H), 7.82 (s, 1 H), 7.10 (m, 2 H), 6.97 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 4.15 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2 H), 4.07 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 2.56 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.44 (m, 4 H), 2.38 (s, 3 H), 1.98-1.92 (m, 4 H), 1.80-1.77 (m, 2 H), 1.70- 1.61 (m, 4 H), 1.59- 1.47 (m, 2 H), 1.44- 1.21 (m, 2 H).
EXAMPLE 12: 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin- l-yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 20)
Step 12a: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-3-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)benzoate (Compound 503-20)
The title compound 503-20 (1.6 g, 100%) was prepared as a yellow oil from compound 502 (4.43 g, 16.3 mmol) and ethyl 7-bromoheptanoate (1.0 g, 4.4 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 503-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 429 [M+l]+.
Step 12b: Ethyl 4-(benzyloxy)-5-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)-2-nitrobenzoate (Compound 504-20) The title compound 504-20 (1.7 g, 100%) was prepared as an orange oil from compound 503-20 (1.58 g, 3.69 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 504-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 496 [M+23]+. Step 12c: Ethyl 2-amino-4-(benzyloxy)-5-(7-ethoxy-7-oxoheptyloxy)benzoate (Compound 505-20)
The title compound 505-20 (2.9 g, 97%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 504-20 (3.2 g, 6.7 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 505-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 444 [M+l]+.
Step 12d: Ethyl 7-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-oxo-3,4-dihydroquinazolin-6-yloxy)heptanoate (compound 506-20)
The title compound 506-20 (1.6 g, 60%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 505-20 (2.9 g, 6.55 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 506-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 425 [M+l]+. Step 12e: Ethyl 7-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-chloroquinazolin-6-yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 507-20)
The title compound 507-20 (1.9 g, 95%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 506-20 (1.63 g, 3.85 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 507-16 (Example 9): LCMS: 443 [M+l]+. Step 12f: Ethyl 7-(7-(benzyloxy)-4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5- ylamino)quinazolin-6-yloxy)- heptanoate (compound 601-20)
The title compound 601-20 (100 mg, 52%) was prepared as a dark solid from compound 507-20 (150 mg, 0.34 mmol) and 402 ( 67 mg, 0.41 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 601-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 571 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): «5 11.22 (s, 1 H), 9.33 (s, 1 H), 8.20 (s, 1 H), 7.84 (s, 1 H), 7.50 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2 H), 7.43-7.32 (m, 3 H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.10 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.97 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 5.29 (s, 2 H), 4.11 (t, J= 8.7 Hz, 2 H), 4.00 (q, J= 6.00 Hz, 2 H), 2.38 (s, 3 H), 2.26 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2 H), 1.82-1.76 (m, 2 H), 1.57-1.35 (m, 6 H), 1.14 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 3 H).
Step 12g: Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2 -methyl- lH-indol-5 -ylamino)-7-hy droxyquinazolin- 6-yloxy)-heptanoate (Compound 602-20)
The title compound 602-20 (130 mg, 94%) was prepared as a yellow solid from compound 601-20 (165 mg, 0.29 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 602-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 481 [M+l]+; 1U NMR (DMSO-/): δ 11.23 (s, 1 H), 10.42 (brs, 1 H), 9.40 (s, 1 H), 8.19 (s, 1 H), 7.81 (s, 1 H), 7.20 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.00 (s, 1 H), 6.97 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 4.09 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.04 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 2.29 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 1.84-1.78 (m, 2 H), 1.60-1.15 (m, 6 H), 1.15 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 3 H). Step 12h: Ethyl 7-(4-(4-fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)- quinazolin-6-yloxy)heptanoate (Compound 603-20)
The title compound 603-20 (70 mg, 44%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 602-20 (130 mg, 0.27 mmol) and l-(3-chloropropyl)pyrrolidine ( 40 mg, 0.27 mmol) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 603-18 (Example 10): LCMS: 592 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-/): δ 11.25 (s, 1 H), 9.36 (s, 1 H), 8.22 (s, 1 H), 7.86 (s,l H), 7.15 (s, 1 H), 7.12 (d, J= 9.3 Hz, 1 H), 6.97 (t, J = 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 4.22 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.10 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.03 (q, J= 7.2 Hz,2 H), 3.02 (m, 2 H), 2.39 (s, 3 H), 2.29 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2 H), 2.23-2.12 (m, 2 H), 1.90- 1.78 (m, 6 H), 1.60- 1.33 (m, 6 H), 1.24-1.19 (m, 4 H), 1.14 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3 H).
Step 12i: 7-(4-(4-Fluoro-2-methyl-lH-indol-5-ylamino)-7-(3-(pyrrolidin-l- yl)propoxy)quinazolin-6-yloxy)-N-hydroxyheptanamide (Compound 20)
The title compound (30 mg, 47%) was prepared as a brown solid from compound 603-20 (65 mg, 0.11 mmol) and freshly prepared NH2OH/MeOH (1.5 mL) using a procedure similar to that described for compound 2 (Example 1):
LCMS: 578 [M+l]+; 1H NMR (DMSO-J6): δ 11.25 (brs, 1 H), 9.35 (brs, 1 H), 8.20 (s, IH), 7.82 (s, 1 H), 7.11 (m, 2 H), 6.97 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 6.19 (s, 1 H), 4.15 (t, J = 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 4.08 (t, J= 6.6 Hz, 2 H), 2.58 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.43 (m, 4 H), 2.38 (s, 3 H), 1.96-1.91 (m, 4 H), 1.80-1.76 (m, 2 H), 1.67 (m, 4 H), 1.54-1.43 (m, 4 H), 1.36-1.32 (m, 2 H).
Biological Assays:
As stated hereinbefore the derivatives defined in the present invention possess anti-proliferation activity. These properties may be assessed, for example, using one or more of the procedures set out below:
(a) An in vitro assay which-determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit a receptor tyrosine kinase. The ability of compounds to inhibit receptor kinase (VEGFR2 and PDGFR- beta) activity was assayed using standard radioisotope assay for kinase. VEGFR2 tyrosine kinase was produced using a baculovirus expression system in Sf21 insect cells from a construct containing a human VEGFR2 cDNA (GenBank accession No. NM 002253) kinase domain (amino acids 790 to end) fragment amino-terminally fused to 6X histidine. PDGFR-beta tyrosine kinase was produced using a baculovirus expression system from a construct containing a human PDGFR-beta c- DNA (GenBank Accession No. NM 002600) fragment (amino acids 558-1106) amino-terminally fused to 6-histidine. The proteins were purified using M2+/NTA agarose affinity column to purity >85% as determined by coomassie blue-stained SDS-PAGE gel.
For VEGFR2/KDR assay, p33 ATP tracers were incubated with purified recombinant VEGFR2 kinase to monitor the enzyme activity. In this assay, reactions were carried out in the presence of 0.1 mg/ml VEGFR2 kinase and 0.33mg/ml myelin basic protein. The reaction was carried out at 300C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 5OmM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 30OmM NaCl, 0.ImM EGTA, 0.03% Brij 35, 27OmM sucrose, ImM benzamidine, 0.2mM PMSF, 0.1% 2- mercaptoethanol and lOOμM ATP. An equal volume of 25% TCA was added to stop the reaction and precipitate the labeled proteins. Precipitated proteins were trapped onto glass fiber B filterplates and excess unlabeled p33 ATP was washed off. The plates were allowed to air-dry prior to the addition of 30 uL/well of Packard Microscint 20. The amount of incorporated isotope was measured using a Perkin Elmer TopCount plate reader. Different concentrations of compounds were added to reaction to assess the activity of compounds to inhibit VEGFR2 kinase. IC50 was calculated using Prism software with sigmoidal dose-response curve fitting. For PDGFR-beta assay, p33 ATP tracers were incubated with purified recombinant PDGFR-beta kinase to monitor the enzyme activity. In this assay, reactions were carried out in the presence of 0.4 mg/ml PDGFR-beta kinase and 20OnM of AbI peptide substrate (E AI Y A APF AKKK). The reaction was carried out at 300C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 2OmM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10OmM NaCl, 0.05mM EDTA, 0.05% NP-40, ImM DTT 50% glycerol and lOOμM ATP. An equal volume of 25% TCA was added to stop the reaction and precipitate the labeled peptides. Precipitated proteins were trapped onto glass fiber B filterplates and excess unlabeled p33 ATP was washed off. The plates were allowed to air-dry prior to the addition of 30 uL/well of Packard Microscint 20. The amount of incorporated isotope was measured using a Perkin Elmer TopCount plate reader. Different concentrations of compounds were added to reaction to assess the activity of compounds to inhibit PDGF-beta kinase. IC50 was calculated using Prism software with sigmoidal dose-response curve fitting.
(b) An in vitro assay which determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit HDAC enzymatic activity.
HDAC inhibitors were screened using an HDAC fluorimetric assay kit (AK- 500, Biomol, Plymouth Meeting, PA). Test compounds were dissolved in dimethylsulphoxide (DMSO) to give a 20 mM working stock concentration. Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm. Each assay was setup as follows: Defrosted all kit components and kept on ice until use. Diluted HeLa nuclear extract 1 :29 in Assay Buffer (50 mM Tris/Cl, pH 8.0, 137 mM NaCl, 2.7 mM KCl, 1 mM MgCl2). Prepared dilutions of Trichostatin A (TSA, positive control) and tested compounds in assay buffer (5x of final concentration). Diluted Fluor de LysTM Substrate in assay buffer to 100 uM (50 fold = 2x final). Diluted Fluor de LysTM developer concentrate 20-fold (e.g. 50 μl plus 950 μl Assay Buffer) in cold assay buffer. Second, diluted the 0.2 mM Trichostatin A 100-fold in the Ix Developer (e.g. 10 μl in 1 ml; final Trichostatin A concentration in the Ix Developer = 2 μM; final concentration after addition to HDAC/Substrate reaction = 1 μM). Added Assay buffer, diluted trichostatin A or test inhibitor to appropriate wells of the microtiter plate. Added diluted HeLa extract or other HDAC sample to all wells except for negative controls. Allowed diluted Fluor de LysTM Substrate and the samples in the microtiter plate to equilibrate to assay temperature (e.g. 25 or 37°C. Initiated HDAC reactions by adding diluted substrate (25 μl) to each well and mixing thoroughly. Allowed HDAC reactions to proceed for 1 hour and then stopped them by addition of Fluor de LysTM Developer (50 μl). Incubated plate at room temperature (25°C) for 10-15 min. Read samples in a microtiter-plate reading fluorimeter capable of excitation at a wavelength in the range 350- 380 nm and detection of emitted light in the range 440- 460 nm.
(c) An in vitro assay which determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit c- MET enzymatic activity.
For c-Met assay, p33 ATP tracers were incubated with purified recombinant c-Met kinase to monitor the enzyme activity. C-Met (Accession number: GenBank NP 000236.2) is characterized as follows: recombinant human catalytic domain (amino acids 956-1390) with histidine-tagged, expressed in insect cells. Purity >90% by SDS-PAGE and Coomassie blue staining. MW = 53.7kDa. Specific Activity of 373 nmole of phosphate transferred to myelin basic protein (MBP) per minute per mg of total protein at 300C. Activity determined at a final protein concentration of 2 μg/mL. Enzyme at 0.41 mg/ml in 20 mM Tris (pH 7.5), 100 mM NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, 0.05% Triton X-100, 2 mM DTT, 50% Glycerol. In this assay, reactions were carried out in the presence of 1OnM c-Met kinase and 5uM myelin basic protein. The reaction was carried out at 300C for 120 minutes in a final assay condition contained 20 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 1 mM EGTA, 0.02% Brij 35, 0.02 mg/ml BSA, 0.1 mM Na3VO4, 2 mM DTT and lμM ATP. An equal volume of 25% TCA was added to stop the reaction and precipitate the labeled proteins. Precipitated proteins were trapped onto glass fiber B filterplates and excess unlabeled p33 ATP was washed off. The plates were allowed to air-dry prior to the addition of 30 uL/well of Packard Microscint 20. The amount of incorporated isotope was measured using a Perkin Elmer TopCount plate reader. Different concentrations of compounds were added to reaction to assess the activity of compounds to inhibit c-Met kinase. IC50 was calculated using Prism software with sigmoidal dose-response curve fitting.
(d) An in vitro assay which determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit HER2 enzymatic activity. 10 nM HER2 and 0.1 mg/ml polyEY were placed in the reaction buffer and 2 mM MnCl2, 1 μM ATP and 1% DMSO final were added. The reaction mixture was incubated for 2 hours at room temperature. The conversion rate of ATP was 22%. HER2 (Accession number: GenBank X03363) is characterized as follows: JV-terminal GST-tagged, recombinant, human HER2 amino acids 679-1255, expressed by baculovirus in Sβ insect cells. Purity >90% by SDS PAGE and Coomassie blue staining. MW = 91.6kDa. Specific Activity of 40 U/mg, where one unit of activity is defined as lnmol phosphate incorporated into 30 ug/ml Poly
(Glu:Tyr)4:l substrate per minute at 300C with a final ATP concentration of lOOμM. Enzyme is in 25 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 100 mM NaCl, 0.05% Tween-20, 50% glycerol, 10 mM reduced glutathione, and 3 mM DTT. References: Meyer, M. et al., EMBO J. 18, 363-374 (1999); Rahimi, N. etal, J. Biol Chem 275, 16986-16992 (2000).
(e) An in vitro assay which determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit EGFR kinase.
The ability of compounds to inhibit receptor kinase (EGFR) activity was assayed using HTScan™ EGF Receptor Kinase Assay Kits (Cell Signaling
Technologies, Danvers, MA). EGFR tyrosine kinase was obtained as GST-kinase fusion protein which was produced using a baculovirus expression system with a construct expressing human EGFR (His672-Alal210) (GenBank Accession No. NM 005228) with an amino-terminal GST tag. The protein was purified by one- step affinity chromatography using glutathione-agarose. An anti-phosphotyrosine monoclonal antibody, P-Tyr-100, was used to detect phosphorylation of biotinylated substrate peptides (EGFR), Biotin-PTPIB (Tyr66). Enzymatic activity was tested in 60 mM HEPES, 5 mM MgCl2 5 mM MnCl2 200 μM ATP, 1.25 mM DTT, 3 μM Na3VO4, 1.5 mM peptide, and 50 ng EGF Recepetor Kinase. Bound antibody was detected using the DELFIA system (PerkinElmer, Wellesley, MA) consisting of
DELFI A® Europium-labeled Anti-mouse IgG (PerkinElmer, #AD0124), DELFI A® Enhancement Solution (PerkinElmer, #1244-105), and a DELFIA® Streptavidin coated, 96-well Plate (PerkinElmer, AAAND-0005). Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm.
Test compounds were dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) to give a 20 mM working stock concentration. Each assay was setup as follows: Added 100 μl of 10 mM ATP to 1.25 ml 6 niM substrate peptide. Diluted the mixture with dH20 to 2.5 ml to make 2X ATP/substrate cocktail ([ATP] =400 mM, [substrate] =3 mM). Immediately transfer enzyme from -800C to ice. Allowed enzyme to thaw on ice. Microcentrifuged briefly at 4°C to bring liquid to the bottom of the vial. Returned immediately to ice. Added 10 μl of DTT (1.25 mM) to 2.5 ml of 4X HTScanTM Tyrosine Kinase Buffer (240 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 20 mM MgCl2, 20 mM MnCl, 12 mM NaVO3) to make DTT/Kinase buffer. Transfer 1.25 ml of DTT/Kinase buffer to enzyme tube to make 4X reaction cocktail ([enzyme] = 4 ng/μL in 4X reaction cocktail). Incubated 12.5 μl of the 4X reaction cocktail with 12.5 μl/well of prediluted compound of interest (usually around 10 μM) for 5 minutes at room temperature. Added 25 μl of 2X ATP/substrate cocktail to 25 μl/well preincubated reaction cocktail/compound. Incubated reaction plate at room temperature for 30 minutes. Added 50 μl/well Stop Buffer (50 mM EDTA, pH 8) to stop the reaction. Transferred 25 μl of each reaction and 75 μl dH2O/well to a 96-well streptavidin- coated plate and incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes. Washed three times with 200 μl/well PBS/T (PBS, 0.05% Tween-20). Diluted primary antibody, Phospho-Tyrosine mAb (P-Tyr-100), 1 :1000 in PBS/T with 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA). Added 100 μl/well primary antibody. Incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes. Washed three times with 200 μl/well PBS/T. Diluted Europium labeled anti-mouse IgG 1 :500 in PBS/T with 1% BSA. Added 100 μl/well diluted antibody. Incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. Washed five times with 200 μl/well PBS/T. Added 100 μl/well DELFIA® Enhancement Solution. Incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. Detected 615 nm fluorescence emission with appropriate Time-Resolved Plate Reader.
(f) An in vitro assay which determines the ability of a test compound to inhibit c-Kit kinase.
The ability of compounds to inhibit c-Kit tyrosine kinase activity was assayed using HTScan ™ Receptor Kinase Assay Kits (Cell Signaling Technologies, Danvers, MA). c-Kit tyrosine kinase is obtained in partially purified form from
GST-kinase fusion protein which is produced using a baculovirus expression system from a construct expressing human c-Kit (Thr544-Val976) with an amino-terminal GST tag. The protein was purified by one-step affinity chromatography using glutathione-agarose. An anti-phosphotyrosine monoclonal antibody, P-Tyr-100, is used to detect phosphorylation of biotinylated substrate peptide KDR (Tyr996). Enzymatic activity was tested in 60 mM HEPES, 5 mM MgC12 5 mM MnC12 200 μM ATP, 1.25 mM DTT, 3 μM Na3VO4, 1.5 mM peptide, and 50 ng c-Kit. Bound antibody was detected using the DELFIA system (PerkinElmer, Wellesley, MA) consisting of DELFIA® Europium-labeled Anti-mouse IgG (PerkinElmer, #AD0124), DELFIA® Enhancement Solution (PerkinElmer, #1244-105), and a DELFIA® Streptavidin coated, 96-well Plate (PerkinElmer, AAAND-0005). Fluorescence was measured on a WALLAC Victor 2 plate reader and reported as relative fluorescence units (RFU). Data were plotted using GraphPad Prism (v4.0a) and IC50's were calculated using a sigmoidal dose response curve fitting algorithm.
Test compounds were dissolved in dimethylsulphoxide (DMSO) to give a 20 mM working stock concentration. Each assay was set up as follows: 100 μl of 10 mM ATP is added to 1.25 ml 6 mM substrate peptide. The mixture was diluted with dH20 to 2.5 ml to make 2X ATP/substrate cocktail ([ATP] =400 mM, [substrate] =3 mM). The enzyme was immediately transferred from -800C to ice. The enzyme was allowed to thaw on ice. The mixture was microcentrifuged briefly at 4°C to bring liquid to the bottom of the vial and returned immediately to ice. 10 μl of DTT (1.25 mM) was added to 2.5 ml of 4X HTScanTM Tyrosine Kinase Buffer (240 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 20 mM MgCl2, 20 mM MnCl, 12 mM NaVO3) to make DTT/Kinase buffer. 1.25 ml of DTT/Kinase buffer was transferred to enzyme tube to make a 4X reaction cocktail ([enzyme] = 4 ng/μL in 4X reaction cocktail). 12.5 μl of the 4X reaction cocktail was incubated with 12.5 μl/well of prediluted compound of interest (usually around 10 μM) for 5 minutes at room temperature. 25 μl of 2X ATP/substrate cocktail is added to 25 μl/well preincubated reaction cocktail/compound. The reaction plate was incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. 50 μl/well Stop Buffer (50 mM EDTA, pH 8) was added to stop the reaction. 25 μl of each reaction and 75 μl dH2O/well was transferred to a 96-well streptavidin-coated plate and incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes. The plate was washed three times with 200 μl/well PBS/T (PBS, 0.05% Tween-20). The primary antibody, Phospho-Tyrosine mAb (P-Tyr-100), was diluted 1 :1000 in PBS/T with 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA). 100 μl/well primary antibody was added and the mixture was incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes. The plates were again washed three times with 200 μl/well PBS/T. Europium labeled anti- mouse IgG was diluted 1 :500 in PBS/T with 1% BSA. 100 μl/well diluted antibody was added and the mixture wais incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes. The plate was washed five times with 200 μl/well PBS/T. 100 μl/well DELFIA® Enhancement Solution was added and the mixture was incubated at room temperature for 5 minutes. 615 nm fluorescence emission is detected using an appropriate Time-Resolved Plate Reader.
The following TABLE B lists compounds representative of the invention and their activity in HDAC, VEGFR2, EGFR, HER2/ErbB, c-Kit, c-Met and PDGFR assays. In these assays, the following grading was used: I > 10 μM, 10 μM > II > 1 μM, 1 μM > III > 0.1 μM, and IV < 0.1 μM for IC50.
TABLE B
Figure imgf000081_0001
The patent and scientific literature referred to herein establishes the knowledge that is available to those with skill in the art. All United States patents and published or unpublished United States patent applications cited herein are incorporated by reference. All published foreign patents and patent applications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference. All other published references, documents, manuscripts and scientific literature cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference.
While this invention has been particularly shown and described with references to preferred embodiments thereof, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes in form and details may be made therein without departing from the scope of the invention encompassed by the appended claims.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound represented by formula I:
Figure imgf000083_0001
or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof, wherein
Zi, Z2 and Z3 are independently selected from the group consisting of CR21,
NR8, N, O or S, where R8 is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic; R2i is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, substituted hydroxy, amino, substituted amino, halogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted thiol, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, substituted carbonyl, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic;
Xi-X3 are independently N or CR21,
Y is NR8, O, S, SO, SO2, aliphatic, and substituted aliphatic; M is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, CF3, CN, N3, NO2, sulfonyl, acyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, arylalkyl, arylalkenyl, arylalkynyl, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylalkynyl, heterocyclylalkyl, heterocyclylalkenyl, heterocyclylalkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, alkylarylalkyl, alkylarylalkenyl, alkylarylalkynyl, alkenylarylalkyl, alkenylarylalkenyl, alkenylarylalkynyl, alkynylarylalkyl, alkynylarylalkenyl, alkynylarylalkynyl, alkylheteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroarylalkenyl, alkylheteroarylalkynyl, alkenylheteroarylalkyl, alkenylheteroarylalkenyl, alkenylheteroarylalkynyl, alkynylheteroarylalkyl, alkynylheteroarylalkenyl, alkynylheteroarylalkynyl, alkylheterocyclylalkyl, alkylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkylhererocyclylalkynyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkenyl, alkenylheterocyclylalkynyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkyl, alkynylheterocyclylalkenyl, or alkynylheterocyclylalkynyl, which one or more methylenes can be interrupted or terminated by O, S, S(O), SO2, N(Rg), C(O), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic; where Rg hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
B is linker;
C is selected from:
Figure imgf000084_0001
where Wi is O or S; Yi is absent, N, or CH; Zi is N or
CH; R7 and R9 are independently hydrogen, OR', aliphatic or substituted aliphatic, wherein R' is hydrogen, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic or acyl; provided that if R7 and R9 are both present, one of R7 or R9 must be OR' and if Y is absent, R9 must be OR'; and Rg is hydrogen, acyl, aliphatic or substituted aliphatic;
(b)
Figure imgf000084_0002
; where Wi is O or S; J is O, NH or NCH3; and Rio is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Figure imgf000084_0003
CH; and (d)
Figure imgf000085_0001
; where Zi, Yi, and Wi are as previously defined; Rn and R12 are independently selected from hydrogen or aliphatic; R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, dialkylamino, substituted dialkylamino, substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio, substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl, CF3, CN, NO2, N3, sulfonyl, acyl, aliphatic, substituted aliphatic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic.
2. A compound according to Claim 1 represented by formula (II):
Figure imgf000085_0002
or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof, wherein Bi is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl; B2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8) or CO; B3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B5 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; M, Y, R', Z1-Z3, Xi-X3 and R8 are as previously defined in Claim 1.
3. A compound according to Claim 1 represented by formula (III):
Figure imgf000086_0001
or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof, wherein Bi is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or aryl; B2 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8) or CO; B3 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B4 is absent, O, S, SO, SO2, N(R8), CO, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; B5 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, aryl, or heteroaryl; Mi is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, O, S, SO, SO2, NH, alkylamine, CO, aryl, heteroaryl; M2 is absent, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, or C2-C6 alkynyl; M3 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, O, S, SO, SO2, NH, alkylamine, aryl, heteroaryl; M4 is absent, Ci-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, or C2-C6 alkynyl; M5 is OH, SH, NR7R8, CO2R8, SOR8, SO2R8, Ci-C6 alkyl , C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic; Y, R', ZrZ3, Xi-X3 and R8 are as previously defined in Claim 1.
4. A compound according to claim 1 in which Y is NH.
5. A compound according to claim 1 in which Y is O.
6. A compound according to Claim 1 selected from the compounds delineated in Table A or its geometric isomers, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, prodrugs and solvates thereof: TABLE A
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
7. A pharmaceutical composition comprising as an active ingredient a compound of Claim 1 and a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier.
8. A method of treating a cell proliferative disorder in a subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of Claim 7.
9. The method of Claim 8 wherein the cell proliferative disorder is selected from the group consisting of papilloma, blastoglioma, Kaposi's sarcoma, melanoma, non- small cell lung cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, colon cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, astrocytoma, head cancer, neck cancer, bladder cancer, breast cancer, lung cancer, colorectal cancer, thyroid cancer, pancreatic cancer, renal cell carcinoma, gastric cancer, hepatocellular carcinoma, neuroblastoma, leukemia, lymphoma, vulcar cancer, Hodgkin's disease and Burkitt's disease.
10. A method of treating an HDAC-mediated disease comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a pharmaceutical composition of Claim 7.
11. A method of treating a cell proliferative disorder that relates to VEGFR and HDAC comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a pharmaceutical composition of Claim 7.
PCT/US2008/075844 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety WO2009036055A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA2698792A CA2698792A1 (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2008299008A AU2008299008B2 (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 VEGFR inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
JP2010524241A JP2010539094A (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 VEGFR inhibitors containing zinc binding moieties
CN200880112746A CN101835375A (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
EP08831199A EP2194787A4 (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US97103007P 2007-09-10 2007-09-10
US60/971,030 2007-09-10
US3528108P 2008-03-10 2008-03-10
US61/035,281 2008-03-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009036055A1 true WO2009036055A1 (en) 2009-03-19

Family

ID=40452449

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/075844 WO2009036055A1 (en) 2007-09-10 2008-09-10 Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (1) US20090076044A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2194787A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2010539094A (en)
KR (1) KR20100080791A (en)
CN (1) CN101835375A (en)
AU (1) AU2008299008B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2698792A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200922590A (en)
WO (1) WO2009036055A1 (en)

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7829574B2 (en) * 2008-05-09 2010-11-09 Hutchison Medipharma Enterprises Limited Substituted quinazoline compounds and their use in treating angiogenesis-related diseases
WO2012044572A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration- resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
WO2012044574A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
WO2012044577A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
WO2014071378A1 (en) 2012-11-05 2014-05-08 Nant Holdings Ip, Llc Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutical applications
US9550760B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-01-24 Nantbioscience, Inc. Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutic applications
US9861624B2 (en) 2012-05-02 2018-01-09 Exelixis, Inc. Method of treating cancer
US10030017B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-07-24 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10112940B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-10-30 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10285991B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2019-05-14 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
WO2021044430A1 (en) * 2019-09-08 2021-03-11 Hadasit Medical Research Services And Development Ltd. Anti-fibrotic compounds and use thereof

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI558710B (en) 2009-01-08 2016-11-21 古利斯股份有限公司 Phosphoinositide 3-kinase inhibitors with a zinc binding moiety
HUE028910T2 (en) 2011-04-01 2017-01-30 Curis Inc Phosphoinositide 3-kinase inhibitor with a zinc binding moiety
CN102199099B (en) * 2011-04-11 2013-12-18 常州大学 Method for preparing 3-bromo-4-methoxyaniline
CA2882270A1 (en) * 2012-08-17 2014-02-20 Cancer Therapeutics Crc Pty Limited Vegfr3 inhibitors
CN104736533B (en) * 2012-08-17 2016-12-07 癌症治疗合作研究中心有限公司 Vegfr3 inhibitor
EP2956138B1 (en) 2013-02-15 2022-06-22 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
US9688688B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2017-06-27 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline forms of 4-((4-((4-fluoro-2-methyl-1H-indol-5-yl)oxy)-6-methoxyquinazolin-7-yl)oxy)-1-(2-oxa-7-azaspiro[3.5]nonan-7-yl)butan-1-one and uses thereof
MX355330B (en) 2013-11-01 2018-04-16 Kala Pharmaceuticals Inc CRYSTALLINE FORMS OF THERAPEUTIC COMPOUNDS and USES THEREOF.
US9890173B2 (en) 2013-11-01 2018-02-13 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline forms of therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
JP2019533641A (en) 2016-09-08 2019-11-21 カラ ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Crystalline forms of therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
WO2018048747A1 (en) 2016-09-08 2018-03-15 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline forms of therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
EP3509423A4 (en) 2016-09-08 2020-05-13 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline forms of therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
CN107840843A (en) * 2017-10-17 2018-03-27 浙江工业大学义乌科学技术研究院有限公司 A kind of synthetic method of AZD2171 intermediate
EP3849554A4 (en) 2018-09-11 2022-06-01 Curis, Inc. Combination therapy with a phosphoinositide 3-kinase inhibitor with a zinc binding moiety

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000047212A1 (en) * 1999-02-10 2000-08-17 Astrazeneca Ab Quinazoline derivatives as angiogenesis inhibitors
WO2005092385A2 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-10-06 Astrazeneca Ab Combination therapy of azd2171 and a taxane

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB0316123D0 (en) * 2003-07-10 2003-08-13 Astrazeneca Ab Combination therapy

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000047212A1 (en) * 1999-02-10 2000-08-17 Astrazeneca Ab Quinazoline derivatives as angiogenesis inhibitors
WO2005092385A2 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-10-06 Astrazeneca Ab Combination therapy of azd2171 and a taxane

Cited By (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8212033B2 (en) 2008-05-09 2012-07-03 Hutchison Medipharma Enterprises Limited Use of substituted quinazoline compounds in treating angiogenesis-related diseases
EP2297115A2 (en) * 2008-05-09 2011-03-23 Hutchison Medipharma Enterprises Limited Quinazoline derivatives
EP2297115A4 (en) * 2008-05-09 2012-03-14 Hutchison Medipharma Entpr Ltd Quinazoline derivatives
US7829574B2 (en) * 2008-05-09 2010-11-09 Hutchison Medipharma Enterprises Limited Substituted quinazoline compounds and their use in treating angiogenesis-related diseases
US8497372B2 (en) 2008-05-09 2013-07-30 Hutchison Medipharma Enterprises Limited Use of substituted quinazoline compounds in treating age-related macular degeneration
JP2017149714A (en) * 2010-09-27 2017-08-31 エクセリクシス, インク. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration-resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastasis
WO2012044577A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
WO2012044574A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
JP2013537916A (en) * 2010-09-27 2013-10-07 エクセリクシス, インク. Dual inhibitors of MET and VEGF for the treatment of castration resistant prostate cancer and osteogenic metastases
KR20140025304A (en) * 2010-09-27 2014-03-04 엑셀리시스, 인코포레이티드 Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration-resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
US11612597B2 (en) 2010-09-27 2023-03-28 Exelixis, Inc. Method of treating cancer
KR101882328B1 (en) 2010-09-27 2018-07-27 엑셀리시스, 인코포레이티드 Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration-resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
US11969419B2 (en) 2010-09-27 2024-04-30 Exelixis, Inc. Method of treating cancer
EA027476B1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2017-07-31 Экселиксис, Инк. Use of n-(4-{[6,7-bis(methyloxy)quinolin-4-yl]oxy}phenyl)-n'-(4-fluorophenyl)cyclopropane-1,1-dicarboxamide for the treatment of castration-resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
WO2012044572A1 (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Exelixis, Inc. Dual inhibitors of met and vegf for the treatment of castration- resistant prostate cancer and osteoblastic bone metastases
US9861624B2 (en) 2012-05-02 2018-01-09 Exelixis, Inc. Method of treating cancer
US9458137B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2016-10-04 Nantbioscience, Inc. Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutical applications
US10160749B2 (en) 2012-11-05 2018-12-25 Nantbio, Inc. Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutical applications
WO2014071378A1 (en) 2012-11-05 2014-05-08 Nant Holdings Ip, Llc Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutical applications
US10285991B2 (en) 2013-02-20 2019-05-14 Kala Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic compounds and uses thereof
US9550760B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-01-24 Nantbioscience, Inc. Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutic applications
US10245261B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-04-02 Nantbio, Inc. Substituted indol-5-ol derivatives and their therapeutic applications
US10112940B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-10-30 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10208039B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2019-02-19 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10611763B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2020-04-07 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10815234B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2020-10-27 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US11535616B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2022-12-27 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10202381B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2019-02-12 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10030017B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-07-24 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
WO2021044430A1 (en) * 2019-09-08 2021-03-11 Hadasit Medical Research Services And Development Ltd. Anti-fibrotic compounds and use thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2010539094A (en) 2010-12-16
CN101835375A (en) 2010-09-15
US20090076044A1 (en) 2009-03-19
CA2698792A1 (en) 2009-03-19
AU2008299008A1 (en) 2009-03-19
AU2008299008B2 (en) 2011-08-04
EP2194787A1 (en) 2010-06-16
EP2194787A4 (en) 2011-11-09
KR20100080791A (en) 2010-07-12
TW200922590A (en) 2009-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2008299008B2 (en) VEGFR inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
US8273785B2 (en) Substituted 2-indolinone as PTK inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
US9169244B2 (en) Tyrosine kinase inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2007296746B2 (en) Quinazoline based EGFR inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2008115262A2 (en) Hsp90 inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2009036057A1 (en) Antiproliferative agents containing a zinc binding moiety
EP2136809A2 (en) Raf kinase inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2009036066A1 (en) Vegfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
US20080161320A1 (en) Fused bicyclic pyrimidines as ptk inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2009036020A1 (en) Mek inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2009114470A2 (en) Tetrahydroindole and tetrahdyroindazole as hsp90 inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
WO2009086012A1 (en) Aurora inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2012216752B2 (en) Quinazoline based EGFR inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2015200733A1 (en) Quinazoline based egfr inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2012261533A1 (en) Substituted 2-indolinone as ptk inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety
AU2012268819A1 (en) Raf kinase inhibitors containing a zinc binding moiety

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880112746.4

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08831199

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2698792

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2010524241

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008299008

Country of ref document: AU

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008831199

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2008299008

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20080910

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20107007649

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A